JP2023041925A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine whose operation means is utilized effectively.

SOLUTION: A game machine 10 capable of executing a game in which identification information varies comprises: operation means (a performance button 25, a cross key) operable by a player; and performance display means (a display device 41) capable of displaying a game performance. The configuration (a sound volume, luminance) of the game machine 10 can be varied by operation on the operation means, and display (a sound volume image G11, a luminance image) associated with the configuration of the game machine 10 can be displayed on the performance display means in response to the operation on the operation means associated with the configuration of the game machine 10.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 56

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

A pattern display device capable of displaying a variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are varied, a decoration display device capable of displaying an effect image associated with the variable display game, and the variable display based on the winning of a game ball in a starting winning area. A game control device for controlling the progress of a game, and an effect control device for controlling the display of the decoration display device based on command information from the game control device, and the stop result mode of the variable display game is predetermined. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to a player when a special result mode occurs, an operating means operable by the player is provided on the front side, the operating means is composed of one button, and There is known a game machine configured to be able to execute a button effect that changes the display content of the decoration display device in response to an input from a button (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2016-163844 A

By the way, there is room for improvement in making effective use of the operating means.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which operation means are effectively utilized.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
In a gaming machine capable of executing a game in which identification information fluctuates,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
and an effect display means capable of displaying a game effect,
It is possible to change the settings of the gaming machine by operating the operating means,
It is characterized in that a display related to the setting of the game machine can be displayed on the effect display means according to the operation of the operation means related to the setting of the game machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to effectively utilize the operating means.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining output processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining payout command transmission processing; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining a winning opening switch/state monitoring process. 9 is a flowchart for explaining probability setting value change processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining probability setting value confirmation processing; It is a flow chart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining hard random number acquisition processing; It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure usual processing. (a) is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, (b) is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit determination processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart explaining processing during normal figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during a normal figure hit. 10 is a flowchart for explaining external information editing processing; 10 is a flowchart for explaining external information editing processing; It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the production control device. 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; It is a figure explaining another example of setting of a probability set value. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining main processing in the first modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining probability setting value change processing in a second modified example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart for explaining determination condition monitoring processing in a second modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining main processing in a third modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining transition determination processing in a third modified example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining states of switches corresponding to probability set values in a fourth modified example; FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining probability setting value change processing in a fourth modification; FIG. It is a figure explaining the schematic structure of the setting means in a 5th modification, and a game control apparatus. FIG. 16 is a flowchart for explaining probability set value confirmation processing in a sixth modification; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining main processing in a seventh modified example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining probability setting value change processing in a seventh modification; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart for explaining probability setting value change processing in an eighth modified example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining probability set value confirmation processing in a ninth modification; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining probability setting value confirmation processing in a tenth modification; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the alert|reporting aspect in an 11th modification. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of a magnetic sensor in a twelfth modification; FIG. 21 is an operation chart of the magnetic sensor in the twelfth modified example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining radio wave anomaly monitoring and magnetic anomaly monitoring in a twelfth modification; FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining main processing in a twelfth modification; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining main processing in a twelfth modification; FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of alerting|reporting. It is a figure explaining an example of alerting|reporting. It is a figure explaining an example of alerting|reporting. It is a figure explaining an example of alerting|reporting. It is a figure explaining an example of alerting|reporting. It is a figure explaining an example of alerting|reporting. It is a figure explaining an example of button production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of button production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of button production|presentation, and an example of alerting|reporting. It is a figure explaining an example of the number-of-payouts notification production. It is a figure explaining an example of the number-of-payouts notification production. It is a figure explaining an example of the number-of-payouts notification production. It is a figure explaining an example of the number-of-payouts notification production. It is a figure explaining an example of the number-of-payouts notification production. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a dramatic sound and an error sound; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation sound and an error sound; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation sound and an error sound; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation sound and an error sound;

<First embodiment>
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

The game machine 10 of this embodiment has a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12 .

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built in the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. is changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper tray 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a batted ball launching device (not shown) and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are stored. An upper tray ball outlet 22 for flowing out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out when the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation handle 24 for a ball shooting device are provided. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with a performance button 25 containing a performance button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 for receiving contact operation input from the player. Furthermore, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .
In this embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Also, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation handle 24, the batted ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front side of the game board 30. fire. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect etc. that intervened the operation of the player are performed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30 . The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40 . That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41 to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).
Further, the left and right parts of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 which serves as a movable effect device for effecting a game including a special figure variation display game by operating movable effect members. The board effect device 44 can operate toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

In addition, in the lower left part of the center case 40, a sub for displaying the fourth symbol for executing the decoration special figure variation display game separately from the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 and the number of starting memories is displayed. An information display device 90 is provided.

This sub-information display device 90 is composed of a single light-emitting section serving as a sub-game display section for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decoration special-figure variation display game corresponding to the first special-figure variation display game. A second sub game display section 91 and a single light emitting section forming a sub game display section for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game. A game display unit 92 is provided. Furthermore, a first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first starting memories that is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game by two light emitting units, and a second special figure variation display game by two light emitting units and a second sub-display 94 that indicates the number of second starting memories that you are entitled to.

In the first sub-game display section 91 and the second sub-game display section 92, a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variation display game is being displayed in a variation display and a display indicating the result are displayed. can be displayed by In addition, the first sub-display unit 93 and the second sub-display unit 94 display the number of the first starting memory (special figure 1 pending) and the second starting memory (special figure 2 pending), respectively, turning off the two light emitting units, It can be displayed by flashing or lighting.

By providing the sub-information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the display region of the display device 41 is not occupied by displaying the fourth pattern on the display device 41, and the display region is effectively utilized. be able to. The sub-information display device 90 is provided outside the operation range of the board presentation device 44, so that the sub-information display device 90 is not covered during the operation of the board presentation device 44. .

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate 34 (normal pattern start gate, start area, inflow area) that provides a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. A game ball that has won the normal figure starting gate 34 is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
In addition, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal figure start gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have entered these general winning holes 35 are detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a starting prize winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that provides conditions for starting the first special figure variation display game. A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, immediately below the starting winning opening 36, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that gives a condition for starting the second special figure fluctuation display game.
The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which the upper end side is turned in a direction in which it is opened to allow the game balls to easily flow in, and this movable member 37b is always It maintains a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which game balls cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device opens the game ball to easily flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). In addition, it is possible to make it possible to win prizes even when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is closed, and to win prizes in the closed state rather than in the open state.
In addition, below the normal variable prize winning device 37, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that did not win a prize such as a prize winning port is provided.

Furthermore, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept the game ball depending on the result of the special figure variation display game A prize winning device (large prize winning opening) 38 is provided.
The special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type open/close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. The closed state (disadvantageous closed state for the player) of the big winning port is changed to the open state (advantageous state for the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open/close door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. During the state, the closed state of the large winning opening is changed to the open state, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, and providing a predetermined game value (prize balls) to the player. It's becoming Inside the big winning hole (winning area), a big winning hole switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning hole. . In the gaming machine of this embodiment, two large winning hole switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the large winning hole is detected by one of the large winning hole switches 38a. By providing a plurality of the large winning opening switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the area to the left of the center case 40 in the game area 32 where game balls flow down is the left area, and the area to the right of the center case 40 is the right area. ing. Then, the player can aim to win a prize in the starting prize-winning opening 36 by adjusting the shooting force and shooting a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed hitting), and shooting a game ball to the right-side game area (so-called By hitting to the right, it is possible to aim for winning the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right game area, and discharges to the right game area. The played game ball is configured to pass through the channel formed by the channel forming member 42 . At least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is made of a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visible from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized from the front of the flow path forming member 42 through the flow path forming member 42. .

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), there are the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a general pattern variation display game triggered by winning a prize and for displaying various types of information.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display unit (special figure 1 indicator) 51 and a second special figure for the first special figure variation display game, which is composed of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. A second special figure variation display unit (special figure 2 indicator) 52 for the variation display game, a variation display unit (normal figure display device) 53 for the general figure variation display game composed of LED lamps, and LED lamps and memory display units 54, 55 and 56 for notifying the start memory number of each variable display game.
In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit (first game state display, right-handed informing unit) 57 for notifying that the game state is more advantageous for right-handed players than left-handed players. A second game state display unit (second game state display, time saving state notification unit) 58 that lights up when a state occurs to notify the occurrence of a time saving state, and a high probability state of a big hit when the game machine 10 is turned on. Third game state display unit (third game state display device, probability state display unit) 59 for displaying what is happening, round display unit 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning device 38) is provided.
In addition, the collective display device 50 may further include a display section (display) or the like that lights up when a big win occurs to notify the occurrence of the big win.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the display device 41 is performing the decoration special figure variation display game, The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The flashing period is set to 100 ms, for example. In the case of this embodiment, in the special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51, in addition to the central segment, the 8th segment provided on the lower right side of the 7 segments is also blinked and varied. It is configured to indicate that it is inside.
When the result of the game is "losing", for example, the center segment is turned on as the mode of the result of losing. The game results are displayed with the result modes (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result modes lit up.

The normal figure indicator 53 flashes a lamp during the fluctuation to indicate that the fluctuation is in progress, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode or lighting color according to the game result. In addition, the general pattern holding indicator 56 displays the start memory number (= number of reservations) of the general pattern starting gate 34, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the general pattern display 53, by extinguishing, blinking, and lighting a plurality of LEDs. The special figure 1 pending display 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = pending number) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 which is the condition for starting the variation of the special figure 1 display 51, by displaying a plurality of LEDs. is displayed by turning off, blinking, or lighting up. Special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is the second start winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) starting memory number (= number of reservations), which is the condition for starting fluctuation of special figure 2 indicator 52, turning off a plurality of LEDs, Displayed by flashing or lighting.

The first game state display unit (right-handed informing unit) 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting). When the game state is such that right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed hitting (during right-handed hitting), the lamp is turned on.

The second game state display unit (time saving state notification unit) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and in the normal game state where the time saving state does not occur (when the variable time reduction function is not activated), the lamp is turned off. When the time saving state is generated (when the variable time reduction function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

The third game state display section (probability state display section) 59 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the game machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned off. When the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on when the probability state of the big win is a high probability state (probability variable state).

The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state is not in progress, the lamp is turned off. turn it on. It should be noted that the round display section may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generation and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to enable operation. be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from the DC32V voltage, and the like. 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of power failure. and a control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting a control signal such as a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. Backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially built-in RAM) of the game control device 100 so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as backup storage means capable of retaining stored data even when the power is cut off. When the power supply is restored, the control can be restarted based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time. The power outage monitoring signal is read repeatedly in the main loop of the main program executed by the game microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B nonvolatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control, and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, a part of a plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not have And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state of the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value is higher in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern (various types) in the special figure variation display game. Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining reach and execution time of variation display game in variation display without reach, hit random numbers for determining hit of normal figure variation display game, etc. and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit. there is

In addition, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (big hit or small win) or loss), the probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the operating state (time-saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of starting memories, etc., from among a plurality of variation pattern tables, any one variation pattern table is selected. to get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table out of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby releasing the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37, It is connected to the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a in the normal starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is negative such as 7V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which receives a logic signal and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the prize winning port switch 35a and the big winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10 or the like, or the glass frame open detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10 or the like. A detection signal from the switch 63 and a detection signal from a body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124 .

Further, the third input port 124 is provided with a set value change detecting means for detecting an operation in the operating section for selecting from a plurality of set probability values to which a probability value for a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned. Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

The setting key switch 152 detects the operation of the setting key operating section forming the first operating section of the operating sections. The setting key operation unit has a keyhole into which a setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. . The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it has been turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The set value change switch 151 detects operation of a set value change button forming a second operation section of the operation section. The set value change button is a push button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed, and turned off when not pressed.

By operating these operation units, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a special result probability value is assigned in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is in the game. It's meant to be used. Here, six settings 1 to 6 are prepared as probability setting values. The probability value assigned to each probability setting is 1/320 for setting 1, 1/310 for setting 2, 1/300 for setting 3, 1/290 for setting 4, 1/280 for setting 5, and 1/280 for setting 6. It is supposed to be 1/270. This probability value is the probability value in the normal probability state, and the probability value in the high probability state is ten times the probability value in the normal probability state.

When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and the game machine is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, thereby setting the probability setting value. can be changed, and by pressing a set value change button in this probability set value change state, the probability set value can be changed. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 .

In addition, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned on after the power of the game machine is turned on. When it is turned to the second position, the probability setting value currently selected is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153, but the probability setting value confirmation mode in which the probability setting value cannot be changed is entered.

The probability set value display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the probability set values in numerals 1-6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a set probability value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs. Alternatively, the probability set value display device 153 may not be provided, and the probability set value information may be displayed using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and character ratio. In this case, while operating on the probability setting value (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), information on the probability setting value is displayed, otherwise the calculated base value and role ratio Give priority to display.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 is provided with a set value change button, a set key operation unit, a probability set value display device 153, and the like, and the game control device 100 uses the probability value for the lottery of the special figure fluctuation display game. can be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit. The function of this setting means may be provided in the sub board for setting and connected to the game control device 100 . That is, the setting means may be provided separately from the game control device 100 . In this case, the operation signal of the set value change switch 151 or the set key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 to change the probability set value in the game control device 100, or the setting sub board side Based on the operation of the set value change switch 151 or the set key switch 152, the probability set value may be changed and determined, and the determination result may be transmitted to the game control device 100. FIG.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test apparatus (not shown). Furthermore, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24) based signal), and an out-ball detection switch signal (a signal based on the detection of the out-switch for detecting all the game balls that have been shot into the game area 32 and have finished playing), and through the data bus 140, the game microcomputer 111 A first input port 122 is provided that feeds into the .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122 , 123 , 124 of the input section 120 . The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61 and board radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The data bus 140 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that it is not possible. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying the signal line of the detection signal of the switch not via the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output unit 130 also has a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (universal electrical solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the open/close data of the. Also, the second output port 134 outputs the display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and character product ratio.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal board 71 . The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information about the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 . Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting display data of the probability setting value display device 153 that displays the selected probability setting value.

Further, the output section 130 is provided with a first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives open/close data signals of the big winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. , a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the lead-in side digit line, and a fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal board 71 an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. , and a fifth driver 138e for receiving display data output from the second output port 134 and causing the status display device 160 to display the data.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111, and a command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 for displaying images on the display device 41. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a memory content that can be stored even if power is not supplied at the time of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of holding data and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338, which constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the content of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decoration lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit that drives and controls the board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the sub information display device 90. 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15; A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the provided board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . In addition, the glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for performance), and the moving movable performance member performs a game performance including a special figure fluctuation display game. A production device may be provided, and a frame production movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame production device may be provided.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44, etc. The function of detecting the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc. signal) to put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from a shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills placed in various places in the game area 32, and the normal figure start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 , the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning hole 35, the starting winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is distributed to the payout control device 200 ( 3) to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 .

In the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) consisting of a non-contact switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit inside passes through the normal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the normal pattern start memory number is the upper limit number (for example, 4 ) If it is less than the normal pattern start memory number is added (+1) and one normal pattern start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator 56 of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern variation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern variation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern variation display game wins and the normal variation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If there is no winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit/loss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time on the general pattern indicator 53 provided in the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the general pattern variation display game. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. In addition, the normal figure display 53 is composed of the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are used as the normal identification information. may be configured.

When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern display device 53 displays a lighting pattern of any one of the first winning stop pattern to the third winning stop pattern, which form a special result mode, corresponding to the type of the win. Along with the stop display, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated and the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display 53 is controlled to display a lighting pattern as a result of the loss.

Winning balls to the starting winning opening 36 and winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory forming the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces) Along with storing, a second starting memory forming a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces). Based on winnings to the starting prize winning port 36 and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37, a jackpot random number value, a jackpot pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. Numerical values are stored in the RAM 111B as first start memory and second start memory. And, the memory number of this start memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display 54 and the special figure 2 reservation display 55 of the collective display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40, the decoration special figure start memory displayed as a display. It is also displayed on the first sub-display section 91 and the second sub-display section 92 of the sub-information display device 90 .

Then, when the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game can be started, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The random number for judging the big hit is compared with the judging value stored in the ROM 111B and set according to the probability setting value, and the process of judging the hit or miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Furthermore, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed.

When executing the first special figure variation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 1 indicator 51 (variation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined variation time. After performing the display during the special figure 1 fluctuation, the process of displaying the first special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. Also, when executing the second special figure variation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 2 indicator 52 (variation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined variation time. After performing the display during the special figure 2 fluctuation, the process of displaying the second special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 (variation display device) displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, characters, etc.) corresponding to the special figure variation display game. (symbols, etc.) is displayed in a variable display game. In addition, the sub game display section of the sub information display device 90 performs processing for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game in which the light emission mode of the light emitting section is changed corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

The decoration special symbol variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers etc. in the display device 41 in the left variation display area (first special symbol), the right variation display area ( 2nd special symbol), in each of medium fluctuation display area (3rd special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed variability) at a speed at which identification is difficult. After a predetermined time, the changing symbols are sequentially stopped in the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of a character to enhance interest.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 makes the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52 a special result mode or a small win result mode. A lighting pattern is displayed, and processing for generating a special game state or a small winning game state is performed. Also, the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also the special result mode or the small hit result mode.

In the process of generating the special game state and the small winning game state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100, for example, opens the opening/closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the big winning opening solenoid 38b, and the game enters the big winning opening. Perform control to enable the influx of spheres. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening is achieved. is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeated) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52 is controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state is finished based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning results in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state. Also, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state, general pattern high probability state, second operation state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. It has become. In this time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state). is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 per unit time is increased more than when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in this embodiment, the normal pattern probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal game state. That is, the operating state of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is controlled in either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than in the first operating state. .

In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec, When the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal electric open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms × 1 time) of the first winning stop pattern, The opening time of the second per stop pattern (general electric open time) and the number of times of opening (e.g., 1700 ms x 2 times), the opening time of the third per stop design (electrical open time) and the number of times of opening (e.g., 1700 m seconds x 3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern stop time, the number of times the normal pattern is opened, and the normal pattern open time are set appropriately so as to control the normal pattern fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 to the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (ordinary figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time (eg 10000ms is 1000ms). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game to be a second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms 704 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric open time) is set to the normal state (normal low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (eg 100 ms to 1352 ms). In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one winning result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (eg, four times). In addition, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the case of the normal operation state. It can be a probability (universal pattern high probability state, eg, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the time to convert longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. In addition, it is also possible to select either the first opening mode or the second opening mode when the win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be separate indicators or the same indicator, but each special figure fluctuation display so as not to be executed at the same time. A game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices and separate display areas for the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or the same display device and display area may be used. However, the decorative special figure variation display games are displayed independently and not simultaneously. Also, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. - 特許庁Also, the second special figure variation display game is to be executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, and when the execution of the special figure variation display game becomes possible, the second special figure variation display game is performed. It is designed to be executed (executed with priority). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as special figure variation display games.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the big winning opening switch 38a, the out switch for detecting all the game balls that have been shot into the game area 32 and have finished playing is equipped with a coil for magnetic detection, and the game ball is detected by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when metal comes close to the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used to detect . In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, first, processing for prohibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, the start address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved is A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order, and 00h at the beginning is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 3 (the third input port 124) is read (step S6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the subordinate control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for normal startup. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

The third input port 124 receives signals from the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 and signals from the body frame open detection switch. By reading the state of the input port 124, it is possible to grasp the state of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 when the power is turned on, and the open state of the front frame 12 (body frame). That is, the game control device 100 serves as open/close detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front frame 12 . As described above, when the power is turned on with the front frame 12 opened and the setting key of the setting key operating section turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is entered. becomes. In addition, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation section not turned to the second position, and the setting value change button is pressed, the RAM 111C is cleared (initialized). ing. The front frame 12 must be opened because the setting key operation unit and the set value change button cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.

By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the standby time starts, the operation of the set value change button can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to continue operating the set value change button from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, such troublesome operations are not required, and a situation in which the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on can be prevented from being accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read through the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) to be checked is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S9). Also, if the power failure monitoring signal has been turned on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits for the power to be cut off. In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the value of the timer is 0. is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the timer value is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), output OFF data to all output ports (set to no output state) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16), and if normal (step S16; Y), the power failure in the RWM It is determined whether the value of inspection area 2 is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), checksum calculation processing is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM (step S18). match the checksum (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 serves as validity determination means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on. If the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the probability set value is changed (step S21). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set.

If it is in this probability setting value change state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and processing for initializing the RAM and processing for setting the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is performed. Here, it is determined that the probability set value is being changed when the power supply is cut off while the probability set value is being changed and the data in the RAM is normally backed up. It is designed to be in a value change state. If the probability setting value is not changed (step S21; N), it is determined whether the body frame (front frame 12) is open based on the previously read state of the third input port 124 (step S22).

In the storage area of the RAM 111C, a probability setting value area, an initial value random number area, a variation pattern random number area, a game control area, and a state display area are set in order from the top. In the probability setting value area, a probability setting value area for storing information on the currently set probability setting value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value are set. be done. This work area includes a working probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state, and an area for storing various flags. In addition, the area for the initial value random number stores the jackpot design initial value random number, the small winning design initial value random number, the winning initial value random number, and the winning design initial value random number which are updated at any time. In addition, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3, which are updated as needed, are stored in the fluctuation pattern random number area. In the area for game control, a work area and a stack area are set in which information (various data and programs) necessary for game control is stored. In addition, in the work area for status display, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying the base value, the character ratio, and the like, and a stack area are set.

The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished playing, and the number of payouts based on winnings in the winning area. The information necessary to display the base value includes, for example, information on the number of game balls detected in the out switch and information on the number of payouts based on the winning to the winning area. In addition, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering the prize opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize gate (excluding middle) (so-called continuous role ratio), information necessary to display the role ratio includes, for example, information on the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information on the number of prize balls (number of winning balls for each role).

The RAM clear head address 2 is the head address of the area for the initial value random numbers, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the initial value random numbers, the area for the variation pattern random numbers, and the The area for game control is cleared. Note that the area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may not be included in the clear target. A RAM clear start address 1, which will be described later, is the start address of the probability setting value area. Area for, area for variation pattern random numbers and area for game control (work area and stack area) will be cleared. Furthermore, the RAM clear top address 3, which will be described later, is the top address of the area for game control, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for game control is cleared. Become.

Regarding the status display area, the legitimacy of the status display edit output process in the timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is determined, and if there is an abnormality, the area is initialized, but the backed up information is not normal. The state display area may also be initialized in the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear start address 1 set in the case is set. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM with the RAM clear start address 1 set, all areas of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

In the checksum calculation process of step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the work area for game control. In addition, one or more of the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, the area for the game control and the area for the state display may be targeted. When multiple areas are targeted, the checksum of each area may be calculated individually and the validity may be determined individually. You may make it determine collectively.

If the body frame is open (step S22; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on based on the previously read state of the third input port 124 (step S23). If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S35 to perform RAM initialization processing and processing to change the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed. If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S23; N) or if the body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24, and the state of the previously read third input port 124 is checked. (step S24).

If the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S24; N), the process proceeds to step S30, and the process for the normal recovery from the power failure is performed. Also, if the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the RAM area for game control initialization. process. That is, the setting value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 is operated by the initialization operation section. Initialization means for initializing the

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S16; N or step S17; N), if it is determined that the checksum does not match (step S19; N), step S25 to initialize all RAM areas. That is, the RAM area for probability setting values and the RAM area for status display are initialized only when a RAM abnormality occurs. In addition, the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area and the RAM area for game control are not only when the set value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when a RAM abnormality occurs. is also initialized.

First, the RAM clear top address 1 is set (step S25), and it is determined whether the body frame (front frame 12) is open based on the state of the third input port 124 read earlier (step S26). If the body frame is open (step S26; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on based on the previously read state of the third input port 124 (step S27). If the setting key switch is on (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35 to initialize the RAM and to change the probability set value changeable state. As will be described later, in steps S35 and S36, the RAM is initialized. In this case, since the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the probability setting value area and the initial value random number area area, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial values are saved. Note that the state display area may also be initialized here.

Also, if the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S27; N) or if the main body frame is not in the open state (step S26; N), the command (specific information) for setting change instruction is sent to the effect control board (effect control device). 300) (step S28), prohibits access to the RAM (step S29), stops control, and waits for power off of the gaming machine. In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the setting change instruction command, the display of the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board production device 44. , the speaker 19a, 19b output voice or the like to prompt the user to change the probability set value. This notification continues until the game machine is powered off.

In this case, after turning off the power of the game machine, if the power is turned on again with the front frame 12 opened and the setting key of the setting key operation section turned to the second position, the setting key is turned on in the process of step S27. It is determined that the switch is on (step S27; Y), and the process proceeds to step S35, where the RAM is initialized and the probability set value changeable state is performed. In addition, when the control is stopped after moving to step S29, without opening the front frame 12 after shutting off the power of the game machine, or without turning the setting key of the setting key operation section to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the data in the RAM remains abnormal and the state cannot be changed to the probability set value change state, so the processing of steps S28 and S29 is performed again.

In addition, although he is trying to perform notification by transmitting a setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, the game control device 100 may perform notification. For example, the game control device 100 may be notified in the collective display device 50 controlled, in the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, so as to perform a display that is not used as identification information Alternatively, an indicator for announcing an abnormality may be provided.

In step S30 of FIG. 6, the initial values at the time of power failure recovery are saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The areas to be initialized here are the blackout inspection area, the checksum area, and the area related to error monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indeterminate state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared and set to an indeterminate state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. After that, the area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S31).

Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S31; N), skip steps S32 and S33 and proceed to step S34. Also, if the special figure is in the high probability (step S31; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is saved in the segment area (step S33).

Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S34), and step S45. proceed to In the case of this embodiment, in step S34, model designation command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, probability setting value information which is information of the selected probability setting value, screen designation A plurality of commands such as a command (for example, a customer waiting demo command in the case of a customer waiting state, and a recovery screen command in other cases) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information, which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, it is possible to perform the effect according to the probability set value, and the effect of the game according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a set probability value such as different selection probabilities.

The screen designation command transmits a command corresponding to the state of the resumed game. When resuming the special figure fluctuation display game that was interrupted by the power cutoff with the resumption of control, a recovery screen command forming recovery information is transmitted as a screen designation command. Furthermore, in this case, information regarding the result of the restarted special figure variation display game is also transmitted. Also, when the power supply is interrupted during the customer waiting state and the control is restarted in the customer waiting state due to the restoration of the power supply, a customer waiting demo command is transmitted as a screen designation command. Also, when resuming the special game state that was interrupted by the power shutdown along with the resumption of control, a special game state resumption command is transmitted as a screen designation command.

In step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to zero (step S35) as a process of initializing the RAM and setting the probability setting value to a changeable state in which the probability setting value can be changed. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area (step S36). Here, when the backed-up information is normal and the process proceeds from step S21 or S23, since the RAM clear top address 2 is set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the area for game control The RAM areas (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0 and the initial values are saved. That is, the probability setting value area and the state display area are not initialized. However, it is not necessary to clear the area for initial value random numbers and the area for variation pattern random numbers.

On the other hand, if the backed-up information is abnormal and the process proceeds from step S27, since the RAM clear head address 1 is set, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, and the area for the variation pattern random number. And the area for game control (work area and stack area) is cleared and the initial value is saved. That is, the game control device 100 serves as initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation section (here, the setting key operation section). Note that the state display area may also be initialized here.

Further, the area to be initialized is an area to be set to a value other than 0 among the areas cleared to 0, such as an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Further, when all RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value is set to 1 by setting 0 to the probability setting value area. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability, damage to the gaming parlor can be minimized even when the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or fraudulent act. By setting a value other than 0 as the initial value, it is possible to set a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) when the entire RAM area is initialized.

After that, a probability setting value changing flag is set as a process of setting the probability setting value changing state in which the probability setting value can be changed (step S37). As a result, the probability setting value change state is entered. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). As a result, it becomes possible to display information on the probability setting value currently set on the probability setting value display device 153 .

Then, the value of the probability setting value area is loaded, saved in the working probability setting value area (step S39), and the command for changing the probability setting is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S40). , the process proceeds to step S45. In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting, the display of the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, the LED light emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the board production device 44 The fact that the probability set value is being changed is notified by operation, sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. In addition, although the RAM is initialized, the command at the time of RAM initialization is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. A setting for outputting a security signal is also performed. In this case, a timer may be set so that the security signal is output only for a predetermined period of time, or the security signal may be continuously output during the period of the probability setting value change state. Also, since the RAM has not yet been initialized here, the setting for outputting the security signal may not be performed.

In addition, in step S41 of FIG. 6 as a process of initializing the RAM area for game control, the RAM clear top address 2 is set (step S41), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42), and the initialization is performed. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the target area (step S43). As a result, the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variation pattern random numbers, and the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0 and the initial values are saved. A timer is also set for outputting the security signal. That is, the game control device 100 serves as initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation section (set value change button in this case).

And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production|presentation control board (production|presentation control apparatus 300) (step S44), and it progresses to step S45. In the case of this embodiment, in step S44, model designation command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, probability setting value information which is information of the selected probability setting value, RAM initial A plurality of commands such as an initialization command (a command to display a customer waiting demo screen and notify RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information, which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, it is possible to perform the effect according to the probability set value, and the effect of the game according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a set probability value such as different selection probabilities.

In step S45, a process of activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC start-up process of step S45, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set.

After that, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on is extracted, and the corresponding initial value random number (in the case of this embodiment, the random number that determines the winning pattern of the special figure (Big hit pattern random number, small hit pattern random number), random number to determine the hit of the normal pattern (hit random number), random number to determine the hit pattern of the normal pattern (hit pattern random number)) as the initial value (start value) of RWM After saving in the area (step S47), interrupt is permitted (step S48). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S49) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number update process, the jackpot design initial value random number, the small winning design initial value random number, the winning initial value random number, and the winning design initial value random number are updated (for example, updated by +1). Here, the "jackpot design initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the "small hit design initial value random number" is the special figure fluctuation display. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small winning stop symbol of the game. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and the "hit pattern initial value random number" is the winning stop pattern of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. A random number that is the initial value for determining In this way, by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main processing, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced. It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not naturally exist in machines without a small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a game machine that does not have a winning symbol initial value random number.

Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number, the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the hit pattern random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. is configured as However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is faster than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same period as the timer interrupt process, which is a unit. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the hit pattern random number, each time the random number goes around, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. ” is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, hit random number, and hit pattern random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S49, the number of times (for example, 2 times) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus is set (step S50), and the power failure is performed. It is determined whether or not the monitor signal is on (step S51). If the power failure monitoring signal is not ON (step S51; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S49). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step S48) before the initial value random number update process (step S49), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting by the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number updating process in step S49 can be performed not only in the main process but also in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. In addition, if the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing, and it is only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing. It has the advantage of being simplified.

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks (step S52; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S51). Further, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily inhibiting interruption (step S53) is performed. A process of outputting OFF data to the output port (step S54) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56). Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S57) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off and a process (step S58) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S59) is performed. ), and then wait until the gaming machine is turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be determined when re-entering.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation section (set value change button, setting key operation section) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization operation section. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time. becomes.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

In the above main processing, after performing the processing of step S28, the processing of step S26 may be returned to, and the processing of steps S26 to S28 may be repeatedly performed until the setting key switch is turned on. . That is, the game control may be stopped to wait until the setting key switch is turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124 rather than the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Furthermore, if the state of repeating the processes of steps S26 to S28 continues for a certain period of time, the process may proceed to step S29 and wait for the power to be cut off.

Further, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is that the body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the ON state. The open state of the frame 12 may not be a condition. Further, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be set as the condition, or only the opening of the glass frame 15 may be set as the condition.

Alternatively, the setting key switch may not be provided, and the setting value change state may be shifted to the probability setting value change state only on the condition that the setting value change switch is in the ON state. That is, if the set value change switch is in the ON state in step S24 (step S24; Y), the process may proceed to step S35 of FIG. 6 without performing steps S22 and S23. In this case, the processing of steps S41 to S44 in FIG. 6 for initializing the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the area for the game control is not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value change state. It is possible to initialize only the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the area for the game control by ending without setting or ending with the same probability set value. In this way, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko game machine can be diverted by shifting to the probability set value change state only on the condition that the set value change switch is in the ON state.

From the above, it can be concluded that in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, A control means (game control device 100) that performs control and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned are set by an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), a setting value change button (setting value A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)), and the control means is a storage means (RAM 111C ), validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability set value. An initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the probability setting when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. This means that the notification prompting the selection of the value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage recovery to a normal state. In addition, by initializing the RAM 111C, the information of the probability setting value set in the game arcade is also lost and the initial value is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a state in which a probability setting value unintended by the game parlor remains set.

Further, the control means is configured to be in a state in which the probability setting value can be selected when the operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage means is checked by the validity determination means. If it is determined that the setting is not legitimate, the notification prompting the user to select the probability set value is continued until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state and to prevent a state in which a probability set value unintended by the game parlor remains set due to initialization.

Further, the control means stops the control of the game and waits for the selection of the probability set value when the information stored in the storage means is judged to be invalid by the validity judgment means. It will happen. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state and to prevent a state in which a probability setting value unintended by the game parlor remains set due to initialization.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means, the game control means, When the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the performance control means to stop the control of the game, and the performance control means transmits the specific information. is received, the notification prompting the selection of the probability setting value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state, and to prevent a state in which a probability set value unintended by the game parlor remains set due to initialization.

Further, when the specific information is received, the effect control means continues the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to prompt a return to a normal state, and to prevent a state in which a probability set value unintended by the game parlor remains set due to initialization.

Also, a game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, in which a game value is awarded to the player. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the first operating section (setting key operating section (setting key switch 152)) and the second operating section (setting value A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (set value change switch 151), and the control means can retain stored contents even in a power-off state. storage means (RAM 111C), when the power is turned on, if the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated, restoration is performed based on the information stored in the storage means, and when the power is turned on, the second operation unit is restored. When the first operation unit is operated, the changeable state is set so that the probability setting value can be changed by the setting means, and when only the second operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, the storage means is initialized. This means that the Therefore, the work of changing the probability set value and clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using a minimum number of operation units, and the work efficiency at the game parlor can be improved. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide an excessive number of operation units, the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced, and the space required for providing the operation units can be reduced.

Further, the setting means can change the probability set value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, the operation of selecting the probability setting value and the operation of selecting the initialization can be performed using the same operation unit, and the work efficiency at the game parlor can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide an excessive number of operation units, and the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced.

In addition, the control means includes legitimacy determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether or not the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the received information is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, a notification prompting the initialization of the storage means is made. Therefore, it is possible to encourage recovery to a normal state.

Further, the control means is configured to enter a changeable state in which the probability setting value can be changed by the setting means and to initialize the storage means when the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid and the first operation section is not operated, the first operation section is operated. This means that the notification to prompt the user to turn on the power is performed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage recovery to a normal state.

Also, a game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, in which a game value is awarded to the player. Control means (game control device 100) and probability setting values to which probability values used for game lottery are assigned are set by a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a switch 151)), and a control means that includes information on the probability setting values selected by the setting means. and a storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information, and the control means initializes the storage means when the game machine is powered on while a predetermined operation part among the plurality of operation parts is operated. This means that the Therefore, the work of changing the probability set value and clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using a minimum number of operation units, and the work efficiency at the game parlor can be improved. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide an excessive number of operation units, the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced, and the space required for providing the operation units can be reduced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 7 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S101). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register saving process to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step S103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, output processing (step S104) for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) and the like is performed based on output data set in various processes. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, random number update processing 1 (step S105) for updating the initial value (start value) of the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the hit pattern random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process (step S105), the special figure 1. Random number update process 2 (step S106) is performed to update the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of special figure 2. After that, it monitors whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the normal gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, and monitors errors ( Winning hole switch/state monitoring processing (step S107) is performed to check whether the front frame or glass frame is open.

Next, a probability setting value change process (step S108) is performed to change or confirm the probability setting value, and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is changed (step S109). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. If it is not in the probability set value change state (step S109; N), it is determined whether it is in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability setting value can be confirmed.

If it is not in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; N), as processing related to the progress of the game, payout command transmission processing (step S111) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, A special figure game process (step S112) for performing processing relating to the figure variation display game, and a normal figure game processing (step S113) for performing processing relating to the normal figure variation display game are performed. On the other hand, if it is in the probability set value change state (step S109; Y) or if it is in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S114 without performing the above-described game-related processing. That is, in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot be progressed.

It should be noted that, if the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, payout command transmission processing (step S111), special figure game processing (step S112), normal figure game processing (step S113) so as not to be performed However, one or more of these may be performed. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed and the prize balls may be paid out. Further, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, random number update processing 1 (step S105) and random number update processing 2 (step S106) are not performed in the probability set value change state, and random number update is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. You can do it. Also, the type of processing that is not to be executed in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S114) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (step S114), the magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring processing (step S115) for checking the detection signal from the board to determine whether there is an abnormality, board radio fraud monitoring processing (step S115) for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is an abnormality Monitoring processing (step S116) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S117) is performed to set signals to be output to various external devices in an output buffer, and a base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch and the number of payouts based on winnings in the winning area. is performed (step S118), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require a command to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the output port 135 for outputting segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the big winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c is synthesized and output (step S142).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step S144). In this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 3. Next, the obtained data and the external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (eg, "door/frame open" data, "security signal" data) are sent to the output port for digit/external information output. 136 (step S146).

After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S148). As a result, the plurality of light-emitting display units provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of the external information are synthesized (step S149), and the synthesized data (for example, "jackpot signal 1" data, "jackpot signal 2" data, "jackpot signal 3" data, "jackpot signal 4" data, "symbol confirmation number signal" data, "start signal" data, "main prize ball signal" data) and the output data of launch permission are combined (step S150), and the combined data is It outputs to the output port 137 for outputting the external information/launch permission signal (step S151).

Next, off output data for the probability setting value display is set as the display content in the probability setting value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability setting value display permission flag is a flag that is set when the probability setting value display device 153 is permitted to display the probability setting value.

If the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (step S154), and the display data is output as the probability setting value display. Output to the port 134 (step S155). As a result, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 . On the other hand, if the probability set value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the probability set value display output port 134 (step S155). In this case, the OFF output data set in step S152 is set, and nothing is displayed on the probability set value display device 153 .

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (step S156). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S157).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (step S158). Further, it loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S159). Then, it loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus, and outputs the synthesized data to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S160).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability setting values are loaded (step S161). Here, the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area as the test signal output data. That is, the data for display of the probability setting value display device 153 is used as it is for the information about the probability setting value in the test signal to the test firing apparatus. This simplifies the processing, and enables accurate information to be output without changing the information of the probability setting value. Of course, display data may be converted into value information and output.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is on (step S162), and if it is not on (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. If it is ON (step S162; Y), the loaded data and setting key switch ON information are synthesized (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. After that, the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test-firing test apparatus (step S164), and the output process is completed.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out prize balls. Winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the prize number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of winning balls generated by winning a prize in the winning opening (scheduled number of payouts) reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). This is an area to be used, and stores prize winning data corresponding to prize balls for which main prize ball signal generation processing has not been performed. That is, the prize number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 also outputs a payout prize ball signal to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By comparing these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (in the case of this embodiment, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, and 14 winning balls). is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning to the winning opening. In other words, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated with a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which it is sent. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, up to 65,535 prizes can be stored in each of the 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1. , the winning ball counter area 2, the winning ball counter area 2, the winning ball counter area 10, and the winning ball counter area 14 are configured to be able to store up to 255 winnings, respectively.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), the winning number counter area to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls is "0". Determine if there is a count number that is not If there is no count (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the count number of all winning number counter areas has been checked. Determine (step S183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

Also, in step S181, when it is determined that there is a count (step S181; Y), the count of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address of is obtained (step S185). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S187). As the value of the remaining number of prize balls area before this processing, a fractional number which is less than the predetermined number which is the reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of output times of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting to the outside of the gaming machine a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as the game balls enter a predetermined prize area. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls concentrates during a big win, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, and the accuracy generated during the big win is delayed. It is possible to prevent the problem that the number of winning balls cannot be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of output times of the main prize ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has reached "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in a busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is on (busy state). be done. In other words, the payout busy signal can also be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal serves as a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

When this payout busy signal indicates a busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, instead of transmitting a payout command for each timer interrupt, a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay out prize balls. It is configured to transmit a payout command when it is in the state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command is not performed, thereby avoiding unnecessary processing. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

Conditions for the payout busy signal to turn on (busy state) are, for example, during payout operation, during ball lending operation, during shot ball running out error, during overflow error, during frame radio wave fraud, payout ball detection switch (distributed ball detection switch) during abnormal payout error, during overpayment error, during payout control device 200, the number of prize balls to be paid out is counted in the memory of payout control device 200 (the number of prize balls that have not been paid out = the number of acquired game balls remaining). ) (when not = 0).

If the payout busy signal is not in a busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the win number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), the winning number counter area to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls is "0". Determine if there is a count number that is not

If there is no count (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is determined whether the check of the count number of all winning number counter areas has been completed. Determine (step S197). When it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above processing is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

Also, in step S195, when it is determined that there is a count (step S195; Y), the count of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 acquires the number-of-payouts command corresponding to the address of (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and is set to 200 milliseconds as an initial value, for example.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) is generated in units of winning one prize in the prize winning area, and is transmitted to the payout control device 200 . The payout control device 200 performs control to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. It constitutes a prize ball command transmission means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when it is.

In this way, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, the data corresponding to winning prizes that have not yet been paid out are held on the game control device 100 side, so that they are backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and backed up by the payout control device 200.例文帳に追加Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function for doing so.

In a conventional game machine (for example, the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. data to maintain the payout control state. However, the conventional game machine requires a backup function, which leads to an increase in cost. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized even if the payout control device 200 does not have a backup function.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the payout of prize balls can be performed by an external device such as a hall computer. It will be possible to accurately grasp the timing, for example, to accurately grasp the base value. In addition, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball have different transmission timings. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be reliably managed.

From the above, the game control is performed comprehensively, and the game ball to the winning area provided in the game area 32 (starting winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special fluctuation winning device 38) A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game control means (game control device 100), and a payout control means (payout control device 200), and the game control means controls the payout of prize ball commands based on a state signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control output from the payout control means. When a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means, the prize ball command is immediately issued. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means without being sent to the payout control means and continuously outputting for a predetermined period. It means that you are trying to do it.

In addition, a plurality of winning regions (starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning port 35, special variable winning device 38) with different numbers of winning balls are provided in the game region 32, and the game control means (game control device 100) , a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control is not transmitted for each number of prize balls, and a state signal can start payout control. and when there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal indicates that the payout control means Whether or not the payout control can be started is specified prior to specifying whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter.

In addition, overall game control is performed, and a prize ball command is issued based on the winning of a game ball to a predetermined winning area (starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning port 35, special variable winning device 38) and a payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling the payout of game balls based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. When the state signal output from the payout control means indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control indicates that the payout control can be started, the control means controls the payout of the prize ball command. A prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) that transmits to the means, and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out according to the winning of game balls in a predetermined prize area. external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting to the outside of the game machine, and the external information output means receives a state signal output from the payout control means, and the payout control means can start payout control. It means that the prize ball signal is output regardless of whether or not there is a prize ball.

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100), when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the prize ball command transmission means immediately is not sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information regarding prize ball commands, and a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information regarding prize ball signals (main prize ball signals). A ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special fluctuation A prize ball command is generated in units of one winning to the prize winning device 38), and when the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the payout control means (payout control device 200) issues the prize ball command. ), the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store the information of the prize in units of one prize to a predetermined prize area, and the game to the predetermined prize area The number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by updating when the ball wins and by updating in correspondence with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means, and the external information output means: The number of prize balls determined to be paid out is accumulated according to the winning of game balls in a predetermined prize winning area, and a prize ball signal is output to the outside of the game machine each time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The ball signal counter is capable of storing winning information in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, updating when a game ball wins in the predetermined winning area, and receiving a winning ball from the external information output means. By performing updating corresponding to the accumulation processing of the number, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been subjected to the accumulation processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game balls. It is configured such that the main prize ball signal is output every time it becomes.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the number of main prize balls signal output by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 scheduled payouts (each time a payout command is transmitted), Output the main prize ball signal for the number of output times set).
Since a prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 balls are actually paid out in response to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the schedule and result can be matched. Ability to deal with fraudulent payouts. In addition, even if you win during the jackpot period, the payout is delayed due to running out of balls, etc., and even if the payout is made after the jackpot is over, the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning will ensure that the hall controller (hall computer) is accurate. Can collect (judge) information.

[Winning gate switch/state monitoring process]
FIG. 10 shows the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning hole switch/state monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is changed (step S299). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. If it is not in the probability set value change state (step S299; N), it is determined whether it is in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability setting value can be confirmed.

If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not set (step S300; N), the processing from step S301 onward is performed as the processing relating to the progress of the game. On the other hand, if it is in the probability setting value change state (step S299; Y) or if it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. That is, in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode, the processing relating to winning is not performed and the game cannot proceed.

In addition, in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, it monitors fraud and winning of the special variable winning device 38, monitors fraud and winning of the normal dynamic winning device 37, and goes to a winning opening that can always win However, one or more of them may be monitored. For example, the special variable winning device 38 and the normal variable winning device 37 may be monitored for fraud. Further, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Also, the type of processing that is not to be executed in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

In step S301, a winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the big winning opening switches 38a in the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S301). A fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S302) is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the winning opening and to detect a normal winning.

The winning opening monitoring table contains a monitoring switch bit that indicates the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, the fraudulent winning error notification command, and the fraudulent winning The upper limit of the number (the number of judging irregularities), the address of the prize winning slot switch table, and the information of the notification timer update information (permission/update) are defined. In addition to the number of times of monitoring repetition (the number of switches), the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table contains, for each switch, a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, and a winning number counter area 2. information of the lower address of is defined. The winning hole monitor table is prepared for each switch to be monitored.

After that, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other big winning opening switch 38a in the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the big winning opening is won even though the big winning opening is not open. A fraudulent and winning monitoring process (step S304) is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning or not and to detect a normal winning.

Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general electric is prepared (step S305), and even though the general electric is not open, the public electric is monitored for illegal winning. At the same time, a fraudulent and winning monitoring process (step S306) for detecting normal winning is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switches (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) is prepared (step S307), and the winning number counter is updated to update the winning number. Processing (step S308) is performed.

Next, a state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals whose states are to be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In this embodiment, the state scan counter is updated from 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) is performed to determine the state such as whether an error has occurred.

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the game machine state monitoring table 1 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, etc. State monitoring based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", state monitoring based on the shot ball cut switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is "2", the state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", the state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. be.

Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a game machine state check process (step S313) for determining the state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the game machine state monitoring table 2 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. When the state monitoring is set and the value of the state scan counter is "1", the state monitoring based on the signal output from the body frame open detection switch 64 is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", state monitoring based on the frame radio wave fraud signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is executed. finish. In this case, there is no state to be monitored in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines whether an error has occurred or not. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the game machine state monitoring table 3 for the value of the state scan counter, if the value of the state scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, etc. Two-signal based condition monitoring is set up. It should be noted that the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 does not define a case where the state scan counter is from "1" to "3".

After that, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is completed. Note that the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter, which is updated for each timer interrupt, is "0", so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 milliseconds, the processing of steps S315 to S317 is performed every 16 milliseconds.

[Probability setting value change processing]
FIG. 11 shows the probability set value changing process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this probability setting value change process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (step S401). is performed (step S422), and the probability setting value changing process is terminated.

If the probability setting value is changed (step S401; Y), if the probability setting value turning off timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value turning off timer is 0. . When the probability setting value turn-off timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability setting value information is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the above-described output processing (see FIG. 8). If the probability setting value turn-off timer is not 0 (step S403; N), the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, and nothing is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the output process described above.

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value has been changed (step S405). Probability setting value changed is a state in which a confirmation operation described later is performed and a probability setting value used in a game is newly set. In this case, the probability setting value changed flag is set. If the probability set value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability set value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406).

Then, in determining whether there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether the input state from the set value change switch has changed to the ON state. That is, it is determined whether the probability set value change button has been pressed. If there is no input from the set value change switch (step S406; N), the process proceeds to step S411.

Also, if there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406; Y), the value in the work probability set value area is updated by +1 within the range of 0-5. The values 0 to 5 in the working probability setting value area correspond to setting 1 to setting 6, respectively. , the probability setting values to be selected are sequentially changed. It should be noted that, when the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the state of 5, it returns to 0. Also, at this stage, only the values in the working probability setting value area are changed, and the values in the probability setting value area storing the probability setting values used in the game are not changed. A set probability value selected based on a confirmation operation, which will be described later, is saved in the probability set value area. Also, although the number of probability setting values is six here, it is also possible to use a number other than this.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S408). As a result, the data displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 becomes information on the newly selected probability setting value. Then, the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability set value turn-off timer area (step S409), and the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). As a result, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is extinguished as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the setting value change button, and a blank display is performed to display nothing, and then new probability setting value information is displayed. will be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated.

Here, a blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as the specific display, but other displays may be used. For example, when the set probability values are displayed using numbers 1 to 6, display other than these numbers may be used as the specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display that is not used as the display of the probability set value. Further, when displaying the probability setting value in a continuous lighting state, the display of the updated probability setting value may blink as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be in a different display mode from the display mode after the specific display. The display mode used as the specific display includes a display mode that blinks, a display mode that has a different blinking cycle than when it is not a specific display, and a display mode that has a different display color than when it is not a specific display. .

In addition, information is transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the operation of the set value change button, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the board production device 44 , output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, or the like, may be used to give a specific notification that the selected probability set value has been changed. That is, the specific notification may be performed together with the specific display or instead of the specific display. Further, the same display as the probability setting value display device 153 may be performed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 indicator 51, and the special figure 2 indicator.

Next, it is determined whether there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operating handle 24 (step S411). The touch switch is a sensor capable of detecting contact of the human body with the operating handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is contact. If there is no input from this touch switch (step S411; N), the probability set value changing process is terminated. If there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value in the work probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S412). As a result, the selected probability setting value is set as the probability setting value used in the game. In other words, touching the operating handle 24 is a confirming operation for confirming the selected probability set value. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be used as the confirmation operation, and an operation unit for the confirmation operation may be provided in the setting means.

After that, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S413). Next, the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S414), a command for changing the probability setting value is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S415), and the probability setting value changing process is terminated. . In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the probability setting value change command, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the LED light emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the board production device 44 The fact that the probability setting value has been changed is notified by the operation, the output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, or the like.

On the other hand, if the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). If the setting key switch is not off (step S416; N), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operating section is in the second position, the probability setting value changing process is terminated. If the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operating section is not at the second position, the RAM clear start address 3 is set (step S417), and RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S419).

As a result, the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. A timer is also set for outputting the security signal. That is, the probability setting value area, the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, and the state display area are not initialized. However, the area for initial value random numbers and the area for variation pattern random numbers may be cleared. In addition, among the probability setting value areas, the area related to the change work, such as the working probability setting value area that temporarily stores the information of the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state and various flags, is cleared. be. Therefore, the probability set value display permission flag is cleared, and the display on the probability set value display device 153 is terminated. In addition, since the probability set value change flag is cleared, the probability set value change state ends.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S420), and a command for ending the probability setting change is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) ( Step S421), the process proceeds to step S48 of the main process shown in FIG. In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the probability setting value change command, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the LED light emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the board production device 44 The completion of the change of the probability set value is notified by the operation, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, or the like. This notification also serves as notification that the RAM has been initialized.

In the case of this embodiment, in step S421, model designation command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, probability setting value information which is information of the selected probability setting value, probability setting A plurality of commands such as a change end command (a command to display a customer waiting demo screen and notify RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The command for ending the probability setting change may be a RAM initialization command. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information, which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, it is possible to perform the effect according to the probability set value, and the effect of the game according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a set probability value such as different selection probabilities.

Based on the above, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, The probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery are assigned are set to a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). A setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from is provided, and the setting means includes a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) that displays information on the selected probability setting value, based on the operation of the operation unit When the display on the display unit is updated in accordance with the selection operation of the probability set value, the specific display is performed for a certain period from the update. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability set value.

Also, the setting means displays, as the specific display, a display that is not used as the display of the probability set value information. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability set value.

Further, the setting means displays updated information as the specific display over a certain period of time in a manner different from that after the certain period of time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability set value.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
FIG. 12 shows the probability set value confirmation process (step S422) in the probability set value change process. In this probability setting value confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability setting value can be confirmed. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is set, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set.

If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not set (step S431; N), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, the display of the probability set value display device 153 is set to a state in which nothing is displayed. After that, it is determined whether or not the game is being played (step S433).

Playing means that a special figure variation display game is being executed, a normal figure variation display game is being executed, a special game state or a winning state of a normal figure is being executed. In other words, this is the case where the game state is a prohibition state that prohibits the start of the probability set value confirmation mode. If the game is being played (step S433; Y), the set probability confirmation process is terminated. That is, when the game is in progress, the probability setting value confirmation mode is not entered. In this case, information to the effect that it is not possible to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode because the game is being played to the effect control device 300 may be transmitted to notify that effect.

In addition, the conditions for determining that the game is in progress (prohibited state) are not limited to those described above. During the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, during the execution of the normal figure fluctuation display game, during the special game state, one or more states selected from among the winning state of the general figure may be set as conditions, for example, the special figure It may be determined that the game is being played when the variable display game is being executed or the game is in the special game state. Further, conditions other than the above may be added, for example, if the operation handle 24 is being operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be determined that the game is in progress and the probability set value confirmation mode may not be entered.

Further, even if the game ball is detected by the out switch for detecting all the game balls that have been shot into the game area 32 and have finished the game, it is determined that the game is being played for a predetermined period and the mode is not shifted to the probability set value confirmation mode. good. Further, it may be determined that the game is being played while the front frame 12 is closed, and the probability set value confirmation mode may not be entered. Further, it is also possible not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode during the power saving mode which shifts when a certain period of time elapses while no game is being played. This power saving mode is canceled when the front frame 12 is opened, and the power saving mode can be regarded as closing the front frame 12 .

If the game is not being played (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state, that is, whether the operating section is in a predetermined state by being operated (step S434). If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S434; N), the set probability confirmation process is terminated. If the setting key switch is on (step S434; Y), the probability set value confirmation mode flag is set (step S435), and the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S436). As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode is started, and the information of the currently set probability set value is displayed as the display of the probability set value display device 153 .

After that, the initial value is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S437), and the probability setting value confirmation command is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S438), and the probability setting value confirmation process is executed. finish. When the probability set value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output as external information for a predetermined period. In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the command for confirming the probability setting value, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the board effect The operation of the device 44, the output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like notify that the probability set value is being checked.

On the other hand, if the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on (step S439). If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439; Y), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. In this case, the probability set value confirmation mode continues.

If the setting key switch is not on (step S439; N), the probability set value confirmation mode flag is cleared (step S440), and the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode is terminated, and the state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability set value display device 153 is set. And, the command of the probability setting value confirmation end is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S442), and the probability setting value confirmation processing is ended. In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the probability set value confirmation end command, the notification that the probability set value is being confirmed is terminated.

That is, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position while the power is turned on, and ends by returning it from the second position. When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operating section turned to the second position, the probability set value change state is entered.

As described above, even if the setting key switch is turned on while a game is in progress, the probability setting value confirmation mode is not entered. , can ensure the fairness of the game. It should be noted that even if the setting key switch is turned on while the game is in progress, the probability set value confirmation mode is not entered. If so, the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode from that time. By doing so, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when the game does not progress, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

In addition, although the condition for not shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode is during the game, it is not limited to this, and the probability setting value confirmation mode is shifted according to the state of the game controlled by the game control device 100 It is sufficient if it is selected whether to do or not. For example, in the case of a high probability state, it is possible not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. Further, as will be described later, it is also possible not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode when a predetermined abnormality has occurred.

Based on the above, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the fulfillment of a starting condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, A control means (game control device 100) that performs control and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned are set by an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), a setting value change button (setting value A setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)), and the setting means is based on the fact that the operation unit is operated and a predetermined state is set. , it is possible to set a confirmation state in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, and when the state of the game controlled by the control means is a prohibition state that prohibits the start of the confirmation state, the operating unit Even if it is in the predetermined state, it will not be in the confirmation state. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to the indication of the probability setting value.

Also, the prohibited state is a state in which the game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the set probability value from being known during the progress of the game, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

Also, the prohibited state is a state of being in a special game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the set probability value from being known during the progress of the game, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, a normal variable prize winning device 37 that can convert between a closed state in which game balls cannot win a prize and an open state in which game balls can easily win a prize, and can generate the right to execute the game by winning a prize, and establishment of a predetermined condition. Based on this, a normal game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) is executed, and when the result of the normal pattern game becomes a specific result, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state (normal pattern winning state) A normal variable winning device control means (game control device 100) that can be generated is provided, and the prohibited state is a state in which a normal game is being executed or in a winning state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the set probability value from being known during the progress of the game, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

Further, the setting means sets the operation unit to a predetermined state when the state of the game controlled by the control means is the prohibited state, and when the prohibited state ends while being in the predetermined state, the prohibited state is changed. Based on the end, it will be in the confirmation state. Therefore, since the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when the game does not progress, the efficiency of confirmation work can be improved.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special game process, first, a start switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start 1 switch 36a and the start 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a game ball winning in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is performed. A game result pre-determination is carried out to determine in advance the game result based on the prize winning at the stage before the start of the figure fluctuation display game.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already timed up, refer to branch to the processing corresponding to the special game processing number A special figure game sequence branch table is set in a register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure variation are performed. A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the setting of the special figure stop display time, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big win, fanfare commands are set according to the kind of big win, and a big winning opening for each big win is made. Processing during special figure display (step A10) for setting fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing processing during fanfare/interval, etc. is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning gate, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big winning gate, etc. are performed. A fanfare/interval process (step A11) is performed.
At step A7, if the special game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, and if it is the final round, an ending command is set; A process (step A12) during the opening of the big prize winning opening for setting information necessary for ball processing is performed.

At step A7, if the special game process number is "5", if the big win round is the last round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged and the big win end process are performed. A large winning hole remaining ball processing (step A13) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the processing.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for carrying out the special figure normal processing is performed.

At step A7, if the special game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs are set, the fanfare command is set, and processing during the small win is performed. Processing (step A15) during a small winning fanfare for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, if the special game processing number is "8", small hit middle processing (step A16) for setting the information necessary for setting the ending command and performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. .
In step A7, if the special game processing number is "9", a process of setting a time for discharging the remaining balls that have won a prize in the big winning opening during the small winning middle process, or a small winning ending process. A small hit remaining ball process (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "10", small winning end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for carrying out special figure normal processing, etc. is performed.

Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) relating to the control of the special symbol variation by the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. . Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A21), the symbol variation control process (step A22) is performed regarding the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 indicator 52. , ends the special game process. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processes are executed. conduct.

Incidentally, a small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of a conditional device, and a big win is a special result that accompanies the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning device 38 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small prize lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting gate switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), hardware random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, It is determined whether or not there is a prize to the 1 start opening (step A103).
At step A103, when it is determined that there is no winning to the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, when it is determined that there is a prize to the first start port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not during the special figure time saving (during general electricity support) (step A104 ).

At step A104, when it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A104; Y), prepare a right-handed instruction notification command (step A105), and transmit the command to the effect control device 300 Effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a prize is not won unless the first starting port (starting prize port 36) is hit to the left, and a prize is not won to the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 unless the ball is hit to the right. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but when there is a first start opening winning during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state) , a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first starting port (starting winning port 36) (step A107), special figure starting port switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, prepare a winning monitoring table for the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A109), perform hardware random number acquisition processing (step A110), and check whether or not there is a winning to the second starting port. Determine (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning to the second start opening (step A111; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A111, when it is determined that there is a prize to the second start port (step A111; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, normal fluctuation It is determined whether or not the prize winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (step A112). It shifts to the processing of A114 and performs the subsequent processing. On the other hand, in step A112, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not normal electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

At step A113, if it is determined that the general electric fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the second start port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), special The starting port switch common processing (step A115) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring processing ends. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hardware random number acquisition process, first, out of the first starting gate (starting winning gate 36) and the second starting gate (ordinary variable winning gate 37), no winning information for the starting gate to be monitored is obtained. After setting (step A121), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored starting switch of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a (step A122). If there is no input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the random number latch register to be monitored (step A124). .

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepared (step A125). Then, out of the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning device 37), set the winning information of the starting opening to be monitored (step A126), and execute the hardware random number acquisition process. finish.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described. Special figure starting opening switch common processing, when there is an input of starting opening 1 switch 36a or starting opening 2 switch 37a, is processing that is performed in common for each input.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the special figure start switch common processing, first, of the start 1 switch 36a and the start 2 switch 37a, information on the number of winnings to the start switch to be monitored is sent to the game machine 10. Load the start signal output count, which is the number of outputs to an external management device (step A131), update the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determine whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting signal output count area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output frequency area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the update target special figure holding (start memory) number corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A135). When the special figure reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated.

Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) is updated by +1 ( Step A136), and save the target start-up winning flag (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hardware random number acquisition process is stored as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) is won (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the first start opening has not been won (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, in step A142, when it is determined that the first start opening is won (step A142; Y), a small hit pattern random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the RWM small hit pattern is prepared. Save in the random number storage area (step A144).

Then, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (step A147), perform the effect command setting process (step A148), and perform the special figure starting opening switch common processing finish.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of a game ball in the starting area of the starting prize winning port 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, and starts the execution right of the variable display game. It constitutes a starting memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a memory. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning port (starting winning port 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) in the above-described starting opening switch common process will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, check the starting opening winning flag saved in step A137 of the special starting opening switch common processing, and determine whether it is winning to the first starting opening (start winning opening 36) (step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that the first start opening is not won (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, in step A151, when it is determined that it is the winning prize to the first starting port (step A151; Y), it is determined whether it is during special figure time reduction (step A152).

In step A152, when it determines with it being in special figure time saving (step A152; Y), it complete|finishes special figure reservation information determination processing.
On the other hand, at step A152, when it is determined that it is not during the special figure time saving (step A152; N), it is determined whether it is during the big hit or the small hit (step A153).
In step A153, when it determines with it being during a big hit or a small hit (step A153; Y), it complete|finishes special figure reservation information determination processing.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the big hit is not in progress or the small hit is not in progress (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. Big hit determination processing (step A154) is performed. Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A156), and in step A140 of the special figure starter switch common processing. Stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the winning is to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
At step A158, when it is determined that the first start opening is not won (step A158; N), stop symbol information for losing is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, in step A158, when it is determined that the first starting port is won (step A158; Y), whether or not the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step A159) for determining whether is performed. Then, when the judgment result is not a small hit (step A160; N), stop symbol information of losing is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit design random number check table is set (step A161), and a small hit design prepared in step A143 of the special figure start opening switch common processing. Stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A162), and the process proceeds to step A164.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A167).

After that, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A168), and perform the production command setting process. (Step A169), end the special figure reservation information determination process.

Incidentally, the big hit determination process in step A157 and the small hit determination process in step A159 are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. That is, determination is made according to the set probability setting value. Also, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead object and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. and transmitted to the effect control device 300 . As a result, the judgment result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to inform the device 300, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., to the player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not a special result will be obtained). determination of whether or not) constitutes a prior determination means. The timing for determining the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Special normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the special figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 pending number is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step A309), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (step A309; N) sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and effect command setting processing (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the fluctuating design determination flag area is cleared (step A315), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316), and the special symbol normal processing is terminated. That is, when the starting condition is not established although the special figure fluctuation display game can be started, a customer waiting demonstration command forming standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, at step A309, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A309; Y), the process proceeds to step A313 without performing steps A310 to A312.

Also, in step A301, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" (step A301; N), prepare a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (step A302). Then, effect command setting processing (step A303) is performed, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) is performed, and special figure normal processing is ended.
Also, in step A305, if the special figure 1 reservation number is not "0" (step A305; N), prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step A306). Then, effect command setting processing (step A307) is performed, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) is performed, and special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the check of the special figure 1 reservation number, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is preferentially executed over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 19(a), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination area (step A321), and the first To determine whether the first special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit or not while setting deviation information and big win information in the big hit flag 1 for deciding whether the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or not. Big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A322) for setting deviation information and small hit information to the small hit flag is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set. (Step A325). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A328), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of special symbol 1 (for example, a signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value ( Here, 100 ms) is set (step A333). Then, the initial value ("0" in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure usual processing will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. This is done with memory as the object.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination area (step A341), and the second A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting deviation information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a jackpot.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure to set the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern Information setting processing (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A348), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value ( Here, 100 ms) is set (step A353). Then, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is ended.

In addition, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process described above, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the details of the big hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20, in this big hit determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the set probability values is set (step A381). The upper limit decision value table is provided for each set probability value, and defines an upper limit decision value in a high probability state and an upper limit decision value in a low probability state (normal probability state). Here, a corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value. A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value, the big hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step A382), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit judgment value can be changed according to the probability setting value or probability state. Also good. In this case, as with the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is specified for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. to set. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be collectively used as a judgment value table.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; Y), set a loss as the judgment result (step A389), and end the jackpot judgment processing. It should be noted that the failure in step A389 means that it is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that it will be determined as a small hit in the subsequent small hit determination processing. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; N), it is judged whether or not it is in a high probability state (step A384). And, if the high probability state (step A384; Y), to obtain the upper limit judgment value in the high probability (step A385), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A387 ). Also, if it is not a high probability state (step A384; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability (step A386), and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A387) . The upper limit judgment value acquired here is obtained by referring to the upper limit judgment value table set in step A381 described above.

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; Y), the judgment result is set to be lost (step A358), and the jackpot judgment processing is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. .

As shown in FIG. 21, in this small hit determination process, first, a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A401). A small hit upper limit judgment value is provided for each probability setting value. Also, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is in a high probability state. Further, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value for the same probability set value are arranged so as not to overlap each other. The range of the big-hit determination value and the range of the small-hit determination value for different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402). Here, the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if it is a different probability setting value. If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; Y), set a loss as the judgment result (step A404), and finish the big hit judgment process. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; N), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; Y), the deviation is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the small hit judgment processing ends. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; N), that is, if it is a small hit, set the small hit as the judgment result (step A405), and finish the small hit judgment process. do.

In addition, as in the case of the big hit determination, the small hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit judgment value may be acquired from the set upper limit judgment value table. The upper limit judgment value in the big hit judgment and the small hit upper limit judgment value in the small hit judgment may be collectively defined in a judgment value table provided for each probability setting value. Furthermore, the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting value is different, but the small hit lower limit judgment value may be different depending on the probability setting value, in this case, according to the probability setting value to select the small hit lower limit judgment value.

In addition, the process of setting the upper limit setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381) and the process of setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401) indicates the referred probability setting value If the value is an abnormal value such as not corresponding to any probability set value, the setting may be performed assuming that it is a predetermined probability set value (for example, setting 1), or assuming that an abnormality has occurred. The game may be stopped and error notification may be performed. In addition, although the probability setting value is referred to for each judgment of the big hit and each judgment of the small hit, when the probability setting value is set in the probability setting value change state, the upper limit setting table corresponding to the set probability setting value Alternatively, processing for setting a small hit upper limit judgment value may be performed, and only this may be referred to when judging a big hit or judging a small hit.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure fluctuation process, first, prepare a symbol stop command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination flag (special figure 1 fluctuation flag or special figure 2 fluctuation flag) (step A601), and set the effect command Processing is performed (step A602). That is, the symbol stop command forming the stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the result is derived and displayed after the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed ends. Upon receipt of the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game and stops and displays the result.

Thereafter, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of this embodiment, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds regardless of whether the stop symbol pattern is a winning symbol pattern, a big win symbol pattern or a small winning symbol pattern, but the display time may be varied depending on the stop symbol pattern. . That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Next, the processing number "2" relating to the special figure displaying process is set as the processing number (step A605), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606).

Next, the signal related to the end of the variation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the special symbol 1 variation is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to the end of the variation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 during fluctuation signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the control timer is initialized in the pattern determination number signal control timer area related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal Save the value (for example, 256 ms) (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 indicator 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610 ), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611), end the processing during special figure fluctuation.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure displaying process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM Processing (step A702) for clearing the small hit flag area is performed.
Then, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), processing (step A704) of clearing the RWM jackpot flag 1 area and jackpot flag 2 area. Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705), and when it is determined to be a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) of the second special figure variation display game is started. Related test signals (for example, condition device operating signal ON, character continuous operating device operating signal ON, special symbol 2 winning signal ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A708), A round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, in step A705, as a result of checking the big hit flag 2, if it is determined that it is not a big hit (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706), and it is a big hit (step A706). If determined as A706; Y), a test signal related to the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the character continuous operation device operating signal is turned on, Special symbol 1 per signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value ("16" or "4" in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM is saved in the round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. After that, prepare a probability information command related to the information to set the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714), production command setting processing (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A717). This fanfare command constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of this embodiment, in step A718, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when there is a jackpot with a ball (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and a jackpot without a jackpot (so-called definite jackpot, etc.). When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is ON at the time of the big hit in the time saving state, and is OFF otherwise. In addition, the big win 3 signal is ON when the big win with the paid out balls is made, and is turned OFF when the big win is made without the paid out balls.

After that, the big winning opening opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game Set (step A719), and save the set jackpot fanfare time in the special game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). This stores the information of the probability state of the special figure and the time saving state when the special result occurs. Then, based on the information stored later, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined.

Then, the large winning slot fraudulent winning number area of the big winning slot (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the big winning slot opening information is cleared (step A722), and the big winning slot corresponding to the big winning slot opening information is cleared. A fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, the fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) for shifting to the fanfare/interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special variable prize winning device 38 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It constitutes special game state generating means for generating a state.

On the other hand, at step A706, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit or not (step A725).
In step A725, when it is determined that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), a high probability fluctuation frequency region for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in a high probability state High probability fluctuation count update processing (step A726) for updating the value of (high probability fluctuation count), production mode information check processing (step A727) regarding the setting of the production mode is performed, and the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high. It is determined whether it is in a probability state (step A728).

At step A728, when it is determined that the special figure is not in the high probability (step A728; N), the decoration special figure command is loaded from the decoration special figure command area, prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting Processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small winning fanfare command is prepared (step A731), effect command setting processing (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. This small winning fanfare command also constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Moreover, in step A728, when it determines with it being in the high probability of a special figure (step A728; Y), it transfers to the process of step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state, the occurrence of the small win opens the big winning opening, but the occurrence of the small win is not allowed in the game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the person aware of it.
Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, "7" is set as the processing number for processing during the small winning fanfare (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

Next, a small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A736), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, a big win 1 signal is turned ON (output with big win + small win) )) is saved in the external information output data area (step A737), and a signal relating to the start of the small winning game (for example, a special symbol 1 small winning signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the area for the number of fraudulent prize winnings is cleared (step A739), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area for fraud monitoring period (step A740).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (turning on the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the right-handed display LED (eg, the first game state display section 57) is lit. Therefore, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A742), and the processing during special figure display is completed.

On the other hand, in step A725, when it is determined that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the number of high probability fluctuations for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in a high probability state High probability fluctuation count update processing (step A743) for updating the value of the area (high probability fluctuation count), production mode information check processing (step A744) regarding the setting of the production mode, and switching preparation remaining rotation corresponding to the production mode number A number is set (step A745), and it is determined whether or not the number of rotations remaining for effect and the number of rotations remaining for switching preparation match (step A746). In addition, the switching preparation remaining number of rotations may be a different value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes, or may be the same value in any one of the plurality of presentation modes. (number of rotations), or may be the same value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes.
At step A746, if it is determined that the number of rotations remaining for production and the number of rotations remaining for switching preparation do not match (step A746; N), set "0" relating to special figure normal processing as the processing number (step A749 ), save the processing number in the special game processing number area (step A750), and clear the variable symbol discrimination flag area (step A751). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A752), and the processing during special figure display is completed.

On the other hand, in step A746, when it is determined that the number of rotations remaining in the production and the number of rotations in preparation for switching match (step A746; Y), the production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the production command is set. After performing the process (step A748), the process proceeds to step A749. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing a look-ahead production from several rotations before the production mode switches, and by transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, the production is performed across the modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction etc. from occurring in

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step S113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the normal game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the normal electric winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the general pattern game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already timed up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. A process of setting a general-purpose game sequence branch table in a register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring a branch destination address of a process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number using the table (step B6) is performed. Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the general-purpose game processing number (step B7).

At step B7, if the normal pattern game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the normal pattern fluctuation are performed. Normal figure normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the general pattern game processing number is "1", a general pattern variation process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the normal pattern display process is performed.

Further, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "2", if the result of the general pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern opening time is set according to whether or not it is in the time saving state. Or, during the general pattern display process (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal pattern per process.
Further, in step B7, if the normal game processing number is "3", the processing during the normal game is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing is set during the normal game. Processing (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing general pattern per end processing is performed.
Also, in step B7, if the general pattern game processing number is "5", general pattern per end processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device (step B14), the pattern fluctuation control process (step B15) is performed, and the general-purpose game process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step B4, when the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, when it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14, and the subsequent processes are executed. conduct.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, details of the general-purpose normal processing (step B8) in the above-described general-purpose game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the general pattern normal processing, first, it is determined whether the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B301), and if the general pattern reservation number is "0" (step B301; Y ) sets "0" for the normal game process as the process number (step B322), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (step B323). After that, the during fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general and electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the normal processing for general and public diagrams is terminated.

Also, if the normal pattern reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), the random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and the hit pattern random number storage area (for the reservation number 1), The loaded area, that is, the winning random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) and the winning pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B302), and the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is increased. It is determined whether it is in the normal pattern high probability made higher than the normal probability (ie, normal pattern low probability), that is, whether it is in the time saving state (step B303).

If it is not in the normal pattern high probability (step B303; N), set the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the normal pattern low probability (step B304), If it is in the normal pattern high probability (step B303 ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of normal pattern high probability (step B305).
After that, it is determined whether the value of the winning random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B306). is less than the lower limit judgment value set in (step B307).

If the value of the winning random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B306; Y), or if the value of the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; Y), the hit flag Save the lost pattern information in the area (step B308), set the lost stop pattern number (step B309), save the lost pattern information in the normal pattern stop pattern information region (step B310), set the stop pattern number to the normal pattern stop Save in the pattern area (step B314).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the winning information is saved in the winning flag area (step B311), and the winning information loaded in step B302 Set the winning stop pattern number corresponding to the pattern random number (step B312), save the stop pattern information corresponding to the stop pattern number in the general pattern stop pattern information area (step B313), and set the stop pattern number to the normal pattern stop pattern. Save in the area (step B314).

In the case of this embodiment, the probability of hitting at the time of normal pattern low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at the time of normal pattern high probability is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the low probability lower limit judgment value is "251", and the high probability lower limit judgment value is "1". Therefore, when the normal pattern is low probability, the value of the hit random number is "0" to "250". In addition, at the time of normal pattern high probability, the case where the value of the random number is any one of "1" to "250" is hit, and the case where the value of the random number is "0" is lost.
In addition, in the case of this embodiment, there are two types of winning symbols.

After saving the stop design number in the normal design stop design area (step B314), the stop design number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the normal figure reservation number is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the process of advancing the order of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 by one I do. By this process, the values for the general pattern holding number 2 to the general pattern holding number 4 in the general pattern random number storage area are moved from the general pattern holding number 1 to the general pattern holding number 3 in the general pattern random number storage area. It will be done. Then, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 4 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B320). Then, the process transition setting process (step B321) during normal pattern fluctuation for shifting to the normal pattern fluctuation process is performed, and the normal pattern normal process is ended. That is, the game control device 100 executes a normal pattern variation display game as a variation display game (based on the normal pattern start memory) based on the detection of the game ball at the normal pattern start gate 34 (inflow area). form.
In this embodiment, in step B320, the variable time is set to 500 ms with a probability of 200/256, 1500 ms with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 ms with a probability of 16/256. .

[Normal map fluctuation process]
Next, the details of the process during normal game fluctuation (step B9) in the normal game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the normal pattern fluctuation process, first, the process number is set to "2" for the normal pattern display process (step B401), and the process number is saved in the normal pattern game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the general pattern display time (for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the result of the general pattern fluctuation display game on the general pattern display device 53, is saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B403). Save the signal (for example, turn off the normal pattern 1 fluctuation signal) in the test signal output data area (step B404), and save the stop flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is stopped in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area. Save (step B405), and end the process during normal figure fluctuation.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-purpose map displaying process (step B10) in the above-described general-purpose map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the normal pattern display process, first, the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern normal process is loaded (step B501), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (step B502), it is determined whether the loaded winning flag is winning information (step B503).

If the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), set "0" for normal game processing as the processing number (step B515), and save the processing number in the normal game processing number area (step B516). After that, the during fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general/universal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the general/universal map displaying process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the hit flag is the hit information (step B503; Y), set the process setting table during the hit (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information (for example, "0 ' or '5') and saves it in the control pointer area during normal per figure (step B505). Next, the value of the hit end pointer corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information (for example, "4" or "7") is acquired and saved in the normal pattern per end pointer area (step B506). Next, the general electric open time (for example, 1700 ms or 2600 ms) corresponding to the general pattern stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step B507).

Next, "3" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal game per process (step B508), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B509). After that, the signal related to the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (for example, the normal pattern 1 hit signal is ON) and the signal related to the normal electric operation start (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 is in operation signal is turned ON) are test signals It is saved in the output data area (step B510), and in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the general electric solenoid, the ON data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B511).

Furthermore, the information in the electric power count area that stores the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the electric power that stores the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 during the ordinary electric fraud monitoring period The information in the fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step B513). Then, the flag for defining outside the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the process during normal diagram display is completed.

[Medium processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the processing (step B11) during the normal pattern hit in the normal pattern game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the normal per pattern process, first, the control pointer during normal per pattern is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal per pattern control pointer is greater than or equal to the upper limit value. (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer during the normal pattern is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step B602; N), the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated by +1 (step B603), and the value of the control pointer during the normal pattern (step (value before being updated by +1 in B603) is performed (step B604).
Also, if the value of the control pointer during the normal pattern is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step B602; Y), without performing the process of updating the processing control pointer area during the normal pattern in step B603 by +1, during the normal pattern Branch processing according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B604).

If the value of the control pointer is "0", "2" or "5", the process proceeds to step B605 to control closing of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device corresponding to the control pointer 37 is saved in the general game processing timer area (step B605), and in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B606), and the general electric solenoid 37c is turned off. End the drawing hit process.

Also, if the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B607, and in order to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer Save the general electric open time, which is the open time, in the general electric game processing timer area (step B607), save the ON data in the general electric solenoid output data area in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c (step B608), End the process during normal per figure.

Also, if the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B609 to control the opening of the normal variable prize winning device 37. Therefore, the opening time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is The general electric open time is saved in the general electric game processing timer area (step B609), and the ON data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c (step B610). End the process.

Also, if the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611, where the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated and the normal electric remaining ball process is performed. is set to "4" (step B611). Then, this process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B612), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time is saved in the normal game process timer area (step B613). After that, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the OFF data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B614), and the processing during the general drawing is completed.

Here, in this embodiment, for example, in step B605, the wait time is set to 300 msec, in step B607, the normal power disconnect time is set to 1700 msec, in step B609, the normal power disconnect time is set to 2600 msec, and in step B613. saves 600 ms as normal electric residual ball processing time.
Furthermore, when the normal pattern stop pattern is "hit pattern 1", in step B505 of the normal pattern display process shown in FIG. In step B506, "4" is obtained as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the normal diagram display process, "1700 msec" is obtained as the normal electric open time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the normal power is opened for 1700 msec because the normal power open time is "1700 msec". The time is set, then the general electric power is opened for 1700 msec because the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "1", and then the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "2", so it takes 300 msec. A wait time is set, and then the general electric power is opened for 1700 msec because the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "3", and then the control pointer during the normal pattern is updated to "4", so 600 msec. is set.

Further, when the normal pattern stop pattern is "hit pattern 2", in step B505 of the normal pattern display process shown in FIG. In step B506, "7" is obtained as the value of the winning end pointer, and in step B507 of the process during normal diagram display, "2600 msec" is obtained as the normal open time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has elapsed, the normal power is opened for 2600 msec because the normal power open time is "2600 msec". The time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "6", so the power is opened for 2600 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "7", so it is 600 msec. Normal electric remaining bulb processing time is set. That is, the game control means 100 executes a normal pattern game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the normal pattern game is a specific result, the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is opened. It constitutes a normal variable winning device control means capable of generating a winning state to be converted (normal drawing winning state).

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, payout command transmission process (step S111), winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S107), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115), board radio fraud monitoring process (step S116) Based on this information, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal, amusement arcade internal management device, or a test firing test device is created and processed to be set in an output buffer.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the external information editing process, first, if neither a glass frame open error has occurred (step S801; N) nor a body frame open error has occurred (step S802; N), , the door/frame open signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the security signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. .
On the other hand, if a glass frame open error is occurring (step S801; Y), or if a body frame open error is occurring (step S802; Y), ON data of the door/frame open signal is sent to the external device. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the ON data of the game machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer, which counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 milliseconds) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like, is not "0", it is updated by -1 ( step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when starting with RAM clear in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810. to process. If the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the process proceeds to step S810 without performing the process of step S809. Transition.

Then, if magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), if board radio fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), if frame radio fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), normal If an electronic fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), or if a big winning slot fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area ( Step S817), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, no magnet fraud has occurred (step S810; N), no board radio fraud has occurred (step S811; N), no frame radio fraud has occurred (step S812; N), and no electricity fraud has occurred. (Step S813; N) If there is no big winning hole fraud (Step S814; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality is occurring (Step S815).
If the switch abnormality is occurring (step S815; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If the switch abnormality is not occurring (step S815; N), the OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, a main winning ball signal editing process (step S819) for setting information about the number of winning balls to be paid out is performed, and a starting opening signal editing process (step S820) for editing the winning signal of the starting opening is performed.
Next, if the pattern determination count control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the execution count of the special figure variation display game is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S821). In addition, the minimum value of the pattern determination count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the pattern determination count control timer is "0" (step S822).

When the value of the pattern confirmation count control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the pattern confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area. (step S823) to end the external information editing process.
Also, if the value of the design determination count control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the design determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S824), the external information editing process is terminated.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 32 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), the random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power outage detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, a performance button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. Inputs from the performance button 25 and the touch panel 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this performance button input processing, when there is an input from the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29, processing for changing performance contents, etc. is performed.

Then, hall/player setting mode processing is performed for setting the changeable range of the brightness of the LEDs and liquid crystals, volume, etc., and receiving operations by the player to change the brightness of the LEDs and liquid crystals, volume, etc. (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) is performed for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) to set the completion of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system period (1 frame 1/30 second), it is determined that it is time to switch frames when a V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C15 that it is time to switch frames (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), LED control of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, the sub-information display device 90, etc. Decoration control processing (step C18) to be performed, movable body control processing (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed, and the processing returns to the processing for clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 33 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands have been received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (step C201). It is determined whether or not the number is 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the number of commands received has been completed. (step C206). Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, commands (data) can be moved to make space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). If it is determined that the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. Also, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 34 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

If it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

Also, in step C235, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of variation commands (step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during the big win, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during the small win. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If it is determined at step C237 that the MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is within the range of the symbol commands (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbolic command (step C239; Y), symbolic command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as pending number commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include a customer waiting demo command, a pending number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of look-ahead symbol commands (step C243). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

Also, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. If it is determined in step C245 that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. Pre-reading effect (also called pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is executed after that. (or what kind of variation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined reliability, display the decoration special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, It is a production such as performing a production display on The look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

In addition, a command related to power-on and a command related to a probability setting value are processed in one-shot command processing. Commands related to power-on include a command for recovery from power failure and a command for RAM initialization. The commands related to the probability setting values include the following commands: changing probability setting, changing probability setting value, ending probability setting change, confirming probability setting value, and ending probability setting value confirmation.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. Even in such a case, the state may be shifted to the probability set value change state. However, since the RAM is initialized at the end of the probability set value change state, during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, during the execution of the normal figure fluctuation display game, during the special game state, or during the winning state of the normal figure It may be a condition that it does not correspond to Moreover, it is good also as conditions that it is in a customer waiting state. Further, when the operation handle 24 is being operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may not be possible to shift to the probability set value change state.

Also, although the RAM 111C is initialized when the probability set value change state ends, the RAM 111C may not be initialized unless it is determined that there is an abnormality in the data in the RAM 111C.

Also, although the probability values corresponding to the respective probability setting values are different, the same probability value may be assigned to different probability setting values. FIG. 35(a) shows probability setting values in this embodiment. The value of the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C takes values from 0 to 5. The working probability setting value area is the same. Setting 1 to setting 6 are assigned as probability setting values corresponding to the values in the probability setting value area. The probability setting value display device 153 displays 1 to 6 corresponding to the probability setting values. Different probability values are assigned to settings 1 to 6, respectively.

FIG. 35(b) shows an example in which probability values are assigned differently. In this example, the probability values of setting 1 to setting 3 are assigned as setting 4 to setting 6. FIG. Therefore, it is practically possible to switch between three levels of probability values. The rest is the same as in FIG. 35(a). By doing so, when six levels of probability values are unnecessary, only the probability values need to be changed, and the design can be easily changed.

It is free to assign which probability value to which probability setting value. For example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, and setting 3 and setting 4 may be assigned the same probability value. Since the value of the probability setting value area (probability setting value area for work) is updated by +1 when the setting value change button is operated, the order of the probability values that change when the setting value change button is operated differs by changing the assignment. order. Further, for example, if two probability setting values are assigned the same probability values as other probability setting values, the number of stages of change can be set to 4 stages, and any stage from 1 stage to 6 stages can be set.

FIG. 35(c) also shows an example in which probability values are assigned differently. In this example, the settings 4 to 6 in FIG. 35(b) are changed to settings 1 to 3, and the display on the probability setting value display device 153 is also changed to 1 to 3 correspondingly. As a result, the display of the probability set value display device 153 and the probability value correspond to each other, and it is possible to make it easier for the person in charge to grasp the probability value.

FIG. 35(d) also shows an example in which probability values are assigned differently. In this example, the setting is all 1, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, substantially only one probability value can be set, and even if the function of changing the probability value is not required, it is possible to cope with the setting of the value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100.例文帳に追加In this case, even if the set value change button is operated, the probability set value display device 153 displays the same display. It becomes easier for the worker to grasp that the order has been accepted.

Although the number of values in the probability setting value area is six, other numbers may be used. For example, in the case of FIGS. 35(b) and (c), the number of values in the probability setting value area may also be three. Also, in the case of FIG. 35(d), the number of values in the probability setting value area may be one. In addition, the number of values in the probability setting value area may be set to 7 or more in order to enable setting of more stages. Moreover, although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the probability setting value display device 153 displays the selected probability value.

In addition, although the probability value of the big hit is assigned according to the probability setting value, the probability value of the small hit is also assigned, and the probability value of the small hit is also changed according to the change of the probability setting value. ing. The probability value of the big hit and the probability value of the small hit corresponding to each probability set value can be determined independently. However, if only the big win and the small win are the result of the special figure variation display game, it is necessary to set the probability value of the small win according to the probability value of the big win. Also, the set probability value for setting the probability value of the big hit and the set probability value for setting the probability value of the small hit may be set separately. Also, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Furthermore, the probability of winning results in the normal pattern variation display game may be set according to the probability setting value that defines the probability value of hitting a big hit, or may be set independently.

In addition, when the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, etc. are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary. , the setting sub-board may be removed, and a sub-board or the like subjected to termination processing such as GND connection may be connected to the connection portion of the game control device 100 with the setting sub-board. By doing so, only the function of changing the probability value can be eliminated without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and the cost can be reduced. Also, in a gaming machine that does not have a probability variation function, an activation probability M may be provided for each probability setting value.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the game control device 100 transmits a payout instruction command to the payout control device 200 when the power is turned on.

The payout control device 200 in this modified example includes storage means capable of retaining stored contents even in a power-off state. This storage means stores the information of the payout command received from the game control device 100, and the payout is carried out based on the information stored here. Thus, since the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the stored contents in the power-off state, the game control device 100 sequentially transmits payout commands regardless of the state of the payout busy signal. . Therefore, the information of the payout command that has not yet been paid out is accumulated in the storage means of the payout control device 200 .

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, main processing shown in FIG. 36 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, when transmitting a setting change instruction command (specific information) to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), a payout instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S81). Upon receipt of this payout instruction command, the payout control device 200 starts the payout based on the information backed up in its own storage means. By doing so, even if the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be performed based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, and the loss of the player's profit is prevented. can.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the setting change instruction command, in addition to performing notification to prompt the change of the probability set value, it is also configured to perform notification to the effect that there is a possibility that a payout will be performed. can be In addition, the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200 is not limited to the above case, for example, in FIG. S40), or when a command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S44), a payout instruction command (specific information) may be transmitted to the payout control device 200.

From the above, it can be concluded that in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, Based on the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling, the production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the production of the game based on the information from the game control means, and the probability value used for the lottery of the game is allocated. A setting means ( A game control device 100) and payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling payout of game media based on payout information from the game control means, and the game control means can control stored content even in a power-off state. storage means (RAM 111C) capable of holding , validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and a probability setting value is selected and an initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for performing the game. When it is determined, the specific information is transmitted to the performance control means and the payout control means to stop the control of the game, and the performance control means makes a notification prompting the selection of the probability set value based on the reception of the specific information. The payout control means is capable of holding stored contents even in a power-off state, and has payout information storage means capable of storing payout information received from the game control means. Based on the payout information, the payout control of the game media is performed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to return to the normal state and not to impair the profits obtained by the player. In addition, by initializing the RAM 111C, the information of the probability setting value set in the game arcade is also lost and the initial value is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a state in which the probability setting value unintended by the game parlor remains set.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. In the gaming machine of this modified example, a plurality of confirmation conditions for the selected probability setting value are prepared.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 37 is performed. In this probability set value change process, a determination condition monitoring process (step S450) is performed to monitor whether or not the conditions for determining the selected probability set value are met.

[Confirmation condition monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the confirmation condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operating handle 24 (step S411), and if there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y ) clears the completion waiting flag (step S457), performs the processing of steps S412 to S415, and terminates the confirmation condition monitoring processing.

In other words, when the worker performs the first operation of touching the operating handle 24, the first determination condition is established with the input from the touch switch as a condition, and the selected probability set value is set. The end standby flag is a flag used for monitoring the establishment of the second confirmation condition, as will be described later. Since there is no longer a need to monitor , the completion wait flag is cleared.

On the other hand, if there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, if the first confirmation condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether there is an end standby flag (step S451). If there is an end waiting flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, monitoring of the second definite condition has already started. If there is no end waiting flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the OFF state (step S452).

If the setting key switch is not in the OFF state (step S452; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the probability setting value change state continues. If the setting key switch is off (step S452; Y), an initial value (for example, 3 seconds) is saved in the change end timer area (step S453), and an end standby flag is set (step S454).

After that, if the change end timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). If the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process is terminated. If the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the process from step S457 onwards is performed, and the confirmed condition monitoring process ends. That is, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation of turning off the setting key switch, which constitutes the second operation, the second confirmation condition is established, and the selected probability setting value is set. It has become so.

As described above, in this modified example, the set probability value selected by satisfying either the first confirmation condition or the second confirmation condition is set as the probability setting value to be used in the game. Until these definite conditions are established, the selected probability setting value is stored in the working probability setting value area, and the information in the probability setting value area storing the probability setting value used in the game is not changed. do not have. Therefore, if the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, the selected probability setting value is discarded and the original probability setting value is set.

In addition, in the probability set value change state, by touching the operating handle 24, it may be notified that the selected probability set value is set. This notification may be always performed in the probability setting value change state, or may be performed only in the state where the end waiting flag is set. Moreover, the first confirmation condition and the second confirmation condition are not limited to the conditions described above and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the second confirmation condition may be only that the setting key switch is turned off. Alternatively, three or more determination conditions may be prepared, and the selected probability set value may be set when one of them is satisfied.

In addition, although the original probability setting value is set when the power supply is cut off before the confirmation condition is established, a predetermined probability setting value may be set. For example, when the probability setting value change state is started, the information in the probability setting value area is set to an initial value (for example, setting 1). may be set. In this case, any probability setting value can be set in advance as the initial value. It may be set as a set value.

From the above, it can be concluded that in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, A control means (game control device 100) that performs control and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned are set by an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), a setting value change button (setting value A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change switch 151)), and the setting means is determined when one of a plurality of confirmation conditions is established. This means that the probability setting value selected based on is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability set value. In addition, by providing a plurality of definite conditions, the degree of freedom of work is increased, and the work efficiency at the amusement arcade can be improved.

Further, the setting means does not set the selected probability set value when the power supply is cut off before any of the plurality of determination conditions is established. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

Further, the plurality of confirmation conditions include a first confirmation condition and a second confirmation condition, the first confirmation condition being that a predetermined first operation has been performed, and the second confirmation condition being the first operation. is that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the probability set value.

[Third modification]
Next, a description will be given of a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The game machine of this modified example does not have a setting key operating section in the setting means and does not have the setting key switch 152 . Also, the conditions for transition to the changeable state in which the probability set value can be changed are different.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, instead of the main process shown in FIG. 5, the main process shown in FIG. 39 is performed. In this process, if the backed-up information is normal and the set value change state is not set (step S21; N), it is determined whether the set value change switch is in the ON state from the previously read state of the third input port 124. is determined (step S61).

If the set value change switch is not on (step S61; N), the process proceeds to step S30 in FIG. 6 to perform the process for normal recovery from the power failure. If the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S61; Y), shift determination processing is performed (step S62). As will be described later, in the transition determination process, it is determined whether or not the conditions for transition to the probability set value change state are established, and when the transition conditions are satisfied, the probability set value changing flag is set. .

If the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S63; Y), the process of initializing the RAM and setting the probability setting value changing state in which the setting value can be changed is performed. 6 to step S35. In addition, in this modification, since the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process, the process of step S37 does not have to be performed. Also, when the probability set value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S63; N), the process proceeds to step S41 in FIG. 6 to initialize the RAM area for game control.

On the other hand, if the backed-up information is not normal, after setting the RAM clear start address 1 (step S25), it is determined whether the set value change switch is in the ON state from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier. is determined (step S64). If the setting value change switch is not in the ON state (step S64; N), a command for setting change instruction (specific information) is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S28), and RAM access is prohibited. (Step S29), the control is stopped and the game machine is awaited to be turned off.

If the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S64; Y), transition determination processing is performed (step S65). This transition determination process is the same process as step S62. If the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S66; Y), the RAM initialization process and the probability setting value changing state in which the probability setting value can be changed are performed. The process proceeds to step S35 in FIG. Further, when the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

[Transition judgment processing]
FIG. 40 shows the transition determination process (steps S62 and S65) in the main process described above. In this transition determination process, first, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether the transition condition is met (step S72). step S73).

In this modification, the staff puts game balls into the prize winning area in a predetermined order within a predetermined time period, thereby shifting to the probability set value change state. Whether or not this transition condition is satisfied is determined from the state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal from is inputted. If this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y), the probability set value changing flag is set (step S76), and the transition determination process is terminated. As a result, the state shifts to the probability set value change state.

If the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), if the transition standby timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step S74), and it is determined whether the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75). . If the transition standby timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds).

If the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the transition determination process is terminated. That is, if the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination process is terminated without setting the probability set value changing flag. As a result, when the backed up data is normal, the process proceeds to step S41 in FIG. 6 to perform the processing of initializing the RAM area for game control. , the processing of steps S28 and S29 is performed and the control is stopped.

The transition condition may or may not be changeable at the game arcade. Also, although the transition condition is to put the game balls in the winning area in a predetermined order, it is also possible to put a predetermined number of game balls in the predetermined winning area regardless of the order. Further, a predetermined detection by one detection means may be used as a transition condition. In this case, the condition may be simply that the detection is made by the detection means, or the detection by the detection means a plurality of times in a predetermined manner (the number of times of detection, the detection interval, etc.) may be the predetermined condition. .

Moreover, although the winning area detection sensor is used as the detection means used to establish the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 or the set value change switch 151 may be used. However, it is preferable that the transition conditions include detection by detection means that cannot be freely operated by the player during the game, such as a detection sensor for the winning area.

In addition, a plurality of DIP switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and are used as detection means used to establish transition conditions, and transition is made when the state of each DIP switch is in a predetermined state. The condition may be satisfied. Alternatively, a keyboard may be provided at a position operable only when the front frame 12 is opened, and used as a detection means for establishing the transition condition, and the password entered from the keyboard may establish the transition condition. .

Further, only when the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the power of the game machine is turned on, the establishment of the transition condition is monitored and the transition to the probability set value change state is made possible. Even when the set value change switch 151 is not turned on, the transition to the probability set value change state may be made possible by monitoring the establishment of the transition condition. In this case, a period for monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may always be set based on the power-on of the game machine, or when the set value change switch 151 is operated after the power is turned on, the transition condition You may make it start the period which monitors establishment of.

From the above, in a gaming machine that can generate a special game state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game value is awarded to the player. The detection means used (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, big winning opening switch 38a) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned , Setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) , and the setting means enables the selection of the probability set value when the detecting means detects a predetermined mode. Therefore, since detection in a predetermined manner by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed. In addition, the number of game machines capable of simultaneously changing the probability set values is not limited to the number of setting keys. improves.

In addition, it is used in a game in a gaming machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result. A plurality of detection means (gate switch 34a, prize winning port switch 35a, starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, big winning port switch 38a) and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) In addition, the setting means enables the selection of the probability set value when a predetermined mode of detection is detected by a plurality of detection means. Therefore, since detection in a predetermined manner by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed. In addition, the number of game machines capable of changing the probability setting values at the same time is not limited to the number of setting keys. improves.

The setting means makes it possible to select the probability set value when the detection means detects the predetermined mode in a certain period after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

Also, the plurality of detection means are inoperable by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the probability set value is changed by a set value change operation unit composed of DIP switches.

A DIP switch forming a set value changing operation section is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and its input state is inputted to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three DIP switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as a set value change operation unit, and the states of the DIP switches corresponding to each probability set value are defined.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 42 is performed. In this probability set value change process, it is determined whether the state of the set value change operation unit has changed (step S461). (step S462). As a result, the desired probability set value can be set by operating the set value change operation unit during the probability set value change state and ending the probability set value change state as a state corresponding to the desired probability set value. becomes.

By using the DIP switches in this way, the task of setting a desired probability setting value is facilitated, and the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance. Since the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance, the probability setting value display device 153 may not be provided. Also, a cover may be attached to cover the DIP switches so that the state of the DIP switches is not immediately visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

Also, in order to make it easier to grasp the state of each DIP switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each DIP switch so that it lights up when the corresponding DIP switch is ON. Further, the confirmation LED may be lit all the time, or may be lit only in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode.

Also, the set value change operation unit is not limited to the DIP switch, but may be a toggle switch or a rotary switch. Anything is fine.

In addition, although the state of the setting key switch 152 changes the probability set value change state, it is possible to shift to the probability set value change state depending on the state of the set value change switch 151 as in the third modification described above, and the state of the probability set value change state is changed for a predetermined period of time. , the probability setting value change state may end. In this case, the probability set value may be set based on the state of the set value change operation section when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the set value change operation section at the time when the predetermined confirmation operation is performed. A probability setting value may be set.

In addition, when the probability setting value is not changed, the currently set probability setting value is compared with the state of the setting value change operation unit, and a monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the two states match. Also good. The monitoring process may be always performed when the probability setting value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time such as when the power is turned on or when the special figure fluctuation display game is started. Alternatively, it may be performed regularly at regular time intervals. When it is determined by the monitoring process that the two states do not match, it is possible to notify that an abnormality has occurred, or to stop the game.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the game cannot be played when the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A for making it possible to change the probability set value is broken. .

In this modification, a setting sub-board serving as a setting means having a setting value change button, a setting key operation section, a probability setting value display device 153, etc. is provided, and this setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100. It's like For example, as shown in FIG. 43( a ), wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100 via a connector 154 . Note that the setting value change switch 151 is omitted here.

FIG. 43(a) shows a state in which the setting key of the setting key operating section is not in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed and the input to the CPU 111A is LOW, so that the input from the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being OFF. Based on this, the probability setting value change state is prevented and the game can be progressed. Further, in the gaming machine of this modified example, an LED is provided as confirmation means for visually recognizing the state of the setting key switch 152 . In the state of FIG. 14(a), the confirming means is turned off, making it possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the OFF state.

FIG. 43(b) shows a state in which the setting key of the setting key operating section is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is open and the input to the CPU 111A is HI, so that it is recognized that the setting key switch 152 is on. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

As described above, the setting key of the setting key operation section is set to the second position and the input from the setting key switch 152 is turned on when the power is turned on, so that the probability set value change state is set. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 constitutes the specific operation information that is input based on the operation of the operation unit so as to bring it into a specific state, and based on the input of this specific operation information. A probability setting value change state is entered in which the probability setting value can be selected. In this probability set value change state, the game cannot be progressed, and the game can be progressed by ending the probability set value change state.

FIG. 43(c) shows the case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43(d) shows the case where the connector 154 is disconnected. In either case, the input to the CPU 111A is HI, and the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being on. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

That is, since the state is the same as when the probability set value is changeable, the specific operation information is input in this case as well. As a result, the probability setting value is changed, and the game cannot be progressed. In this way, by inputting the specific operation information even when there is a disconnection or disconnection of the connector, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing when there is an abnormality. In addition, since the confirmation means is lit even though the setting key of the setting key operating section is not at the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

Although the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 are connected by the connector 154 here, they may be directly connected without the connector 154 . In addition, although the setting sub-board serving as setting means including the setting key switch 152 and the like is provided separately from the game control device 100, the game control device 100 is provided with the setting key switch 152 and the like, and the setting means includes the setting key switch 152 and the like. may be integrated with the game control device 100, and in this case also, it is possible to detect disconnection or connector disconnection between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A with the same configuration.

Also, here, when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is interrupted, the specific operation information is input. Information may be input. Also, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switches 152 and the like within the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output specific operation information.

From the above, it can be concluded that in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, A control means (game control device 100) for performing control, and a probability setting value connected to the control means and to which a probability value used for lottery of the game is assigned is set by an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)). A setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a value change button (set value change switch 151)), and the operation unit is operated to be in a specific state. Based on this, the specific operation information is input to the control means so that the probability set value can be selected, and the control means prevents the progress of the game while the specific operation information is being input. When the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, the specific operation information is input to the control means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally changing the probability set value.

Further, when the power is turned on while the operation unit is operated to be in a specific state, the probability setting value can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally changing the probability set value.

[Sixth modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example differs in the conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
In this modification, instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 12, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 44 is performed. In this probability set value confirmation process, if the game is being played (step S433; Y), the OFF state confirmation flag is cleared (step S474), and the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. If the game is not being played (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on (step S434), and if not (step S434; N), an off state confirmation flag is set. (step S473), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. This off state confirmation flag is information indicating that the setting key switch was in the off state while the game was not in progress.

If the setting key switch is ON (step S434; Y), it is determined whether there is an OFF state confirmation flag (step S471). If there is an off-state confirmation flag (step S471; Y), the off-state confirmation flag is cleared (step S472), the processes after step S435 are performed, and the probability set value confirmation mode is entered. On the other hand, if there is no OFF state confirmation flag (step S471; N), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. That is, if the setting key switch is turned on during the game and the game is not in the game, the probability set value confirmation mode is not entered. When it changes to ON state, it transfers to probability setting value confirmation mode.

In this way, by preventing the shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch remains in the ON state during the game, it is possible to prevent the shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. When the setting key switch is turned on without being played, the probability setting value is prevented from being displayed after shifting to the probability setting value confirming mode due to the non-playing state (non-prohibited state). . That is, it is possible to set the probability setting value to a state in which it can be confirmed only when an operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability setting value.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) operates the operating section (setting key operating section (setting key switch 152)) when the state of the game controlled by the control means (game control device 100) is not prohibited. is changed to the predetermined state, the confirmation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being indicated unintentionally.

[Seventh modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The game machine of this modified example has a RAM clear button as a third operation section in addition to a setting key operation section as a first operation section and a set value change button as a second operation section. A signal from the RAM clear switch that detects the operation of the RAM clear button is input to the game control device 100 . Also, the RAM clear button cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, like the setting key operation section and the setting value change button.

[Main processing]
In this modification, main processing shown in FIG. 45 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this main process, when the RAM clear switch is in the ON state (the RAM clear button is pressed) (step S481; Y), the process proceeds to step S41. That is, the RAM clear switch serves as an operation unit for initializing the RAM 111C.

[Probability setting value change processing]
46 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change process, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch (it is in the ON state) (step S482; Y), the processes after step S412 are performed to determine the selected probability setting value. conduct.

Thus, the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the RAM clear button is pressed. The work of determining the probability setting value can be selectively performed using a minimum number of operation units, and the work efficiency in the game parlor can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide an excessive number of operation units, and the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced.

When the setting key switch is operated when the power is turned on, the probability set value change state is entered and the RAM is initialized, whereas when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, the probability set value is changed. Since only the RAM can be initialized without transitioning to the state, when only the RAM is to be initialized, there is no need to operate the setting key switch or shift to the probability set value change state. It is possible to improve the work efficiency at the game store.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) includes a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch )), the memory means (RAM 111C ) can be initialized. Further, by operating a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), the selected probability setting value can be confirmed.

Also, a game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, in which a game value is awarded to the player. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the first operating section (setting key operating section (setting key switch 152)), the second operating section (setting value A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (set value change switch 151) and a third operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), and setting storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling the game by the control means including information on the probability setting value selected by the means; A convertible body frame (front frame 12) and open/close detection means (game control device 100) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the body frame are provided, and the control means detects the open/close detection means when the body frame is open. is detected and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the first operation unit is operated, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, and the main body When the opening/closing detection means detects that the frame is in an open state and the gaming machine is powered on while the third operation unit is being operated, the probability setting value is not changed. This means that the storage means is initialized. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the probability set value when only the RAM is to be initialized, and the work efficiency at the game parlor can be improved.

Further, when the opening/closing detection means detects that the main body frame is open and the gaming machine is powered on while the first operation section and the third operation section are operated, the control means The probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, the open/close detection means detects that the body frame is in the closed state, and the first operation section and the third operation section are operated. When the gaming machine is turned on in this state, the storage means is initialized without changing the probability set value. Therefore, even if the first operation section and the third operation section are operated at the same time, it is possible to shift to the probability set value change state, and the work efficiency in the game parlor can be improved. Further, when the body frame is in the closed state, even if the first operation unit is operated, the probability setting value change state is not entered, thereby preventing fraudulent actions.

In FIG. 45, by checking the state of the setting key switch before confirming the state of the RAM clear switch, even if the setting key operation unit and the RAM clear button are operated at the same time, the probability setting value change state is entered. However, the setting key switch being on and the RAM clear switch being on may also be used as conditions for transition to the probability set value change state. By making operation of a plurality of operation units a condition, it is possible to clearly confirm the intention of shifting to the probability setting value change state.

In the case of the gaming machine of the first embodiment without the RAM clear button, the opening/closing detection means detects that the body frame is open, and the setting key operation section and the setting value change button are operated. when the game machine is powered on, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, the open/close detection means detects that the body frame is closed, and When the game machine is powered on while the setting key operation part and the set value change button are being operated, the memory means is initialized without allowing the probability set value to be changed. It can be said that In this case as well, the setting key switch being ON and the setting value changing switch being ON may be used as the condition for transition to the probability setting value changing state.

Further, the setting means can change the probability set value by operating the second operation section. Further, the setting means can confirm the selected probability set value by operating the third operation section.

Incidentally, in FIG. 46, the functions of the probability value change switch and the RAM clear switch may be interchanged. That is, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch, the processing from step S407 onwards is performed to change the probability setting value to be selected, and when there is an input from the set value change switch, the processing from step S412 onwards is performed. , a process for determining the selected probability setting value may be performed.

[Eighth modification]
Next, an eighth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The game machine of this modified example differs in the confirmation operation of the probability set value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In this modification, instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 47 is performed. In this probability set value change process, when the set value change switch is operated in the first input mode (step S491; Y), the processes after step S407 are performed to change the probability set value to be selected. Also, when the set value change switch is operated in the second input mode (step S492; Y), the processing after step S412 is performed to determine the selected probability set value.

Here, the first input mode is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed within a predetermined time, and the first input mode exists at the time when the pressing is completed. I'm trying to judge. That is, when the set value change button is released for a short time (when the set value change switch 151 is turned off), the probability set value is changed. The reason why the set value change button is released is to prevent the probability set value from being updated when the second input mode described below is performed.

Further, the second input mode is an input mode in which the set value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed in a predetermined time or longer, and the second input mode is present when the specified time has passed. I'm trying to judge. In other words, the probability setting value is determined when the pressing operation is performed for a long time exceeding a specified time (when the set value change switch 151 is turned on for a specified time or longer).

In this way, the probability setting value can be selected and confirmed by the setting value change button, and the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the setting value change button is pressed. It is possible to selectively perform the operations of changing and fixing set values and clearing the RAM using a minimum number of operating units, thereby improving the working efficiency in the game arcade. Further, it is not necessary to provide an excessive number of operation units, and the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. It should be noted that the first input mode and the second input mode are not limited to the operations described above, and may be any operations as long as they can be distinguished from each other.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) has a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). When the gaming machine is turned on in an operated state, the memory means (RAM 111C) can be initialized, and the selected probability set value can be determined by operating a predetermined operation unit. It will be

[Ninth Modification]
Next, a ninth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example differs in the conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
In this modified example, instead of the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 12, the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 48 is performed. In this probability set value confirmation process, if the game is not being played (step S433; N), it is determined whether a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501). Then, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process is ended and the probability setting value confirmation mode is not entered.

Predetermined abnormalities can be arbitrarily set, but here, they are magnet fraud, board radio fraud, frame radio fraud, general electric fraud, and big prize mouth fraud. If any of these abnormalities are occurring, it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred. These abnormalities are abnormalities caused by fraudulent behavior, and by not shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode when such an abnormality occurs, the probability set value is known to the person who commits fraudulent behavior. You can prevent it from being lost.

Also, switch malfunction due to disconnection of a connector, shoot ball burnout error, overflow error, dispensing malfunction error, and glass frame opening error are not included in the predetermined malfunctions, but they may be included in the predetermined malfunctions. In addition, since the front frame 12 is opened to operate the setting key operation unit and the set value change button, the front frame opening error is not included in the predetermined abnormalities.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30, when any of these abnormalities occurs, a security signal forming specific external information is output to the outside so as to inform the amusement arcade of the occurrence of the abnormality. Thus, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known during the period from the time when the occurrence of the abnormality is reported to the time when the person in charge confirms it.

Note that this security signal is output for a predetermined period even when the RAM 111C is initialized or when the probability set value confirmation mode is started, so as to prompt confirmation of the gaming machine. A device external to the game machine can recognize that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the output of the security signal over a predetermined period of time.

In addition, even if the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality occurs, the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode, but when a predetermined abnormality occurs, the setting key switch is turned on. If all of the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the switch is in the on state, the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Further, by applying the configuration of the sixth modified example described above, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode only when the setting key switch is changed from the OFF state to the ON state in a state where a predetermined abnormality does not occur. You can do it. In this case, when the game is being played (step S433; Y) and when a predetermined abnormality is occurring (step S501; Y), the OFF state confirmation flag is cleared.

In this way, by preventing the shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch is kept on from the state where a predetermined abnormality occurs, the probability setting value confirmation mode is prohibited. If the setting key switch is unintentionally turned on in a state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the predetermined abnormality is subsequently eliminated (a state that is not a prohibited state), and the probability setting value It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed after shifting to the confirmation mode. That is, it is possible to set the probability setting value to a state in which it can be confirmed only when an operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability setting value.

From the above, it can be concluded that in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, A control means (game control device 100) that performs control and a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned are set by an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), a setting value change button (setting value A setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)), and the setting means is based on the fact that the operation unit is operated to be in a predetermined state. , it is possible to set a confirmation state in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, and when the state of the game controlled by the control means is a state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the operation unit is in a predetermined state Even if it is, it will not be in the confirmation state. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to the indication of the probability setting value.

Further, the predetermined abnormality includes a plurality of types of abnormality, the control means can output information to the outside of the game machine, and when any of the predetermined abnormality occurs, the predetermined abnormality is detected. This means that the specific external information (security signal) is output to the outside until all the problems are resolved. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the game machine that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to notify the outside that the probability setting value cannot be confirmed, and the probability setting value is indicated. Inconvenience caused by this can be prevented.

In addition, a storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information necessary for game control is provided, and the control means stores specific external information for a predetermined period when the storage means is initialized and when the confirmation state is started. It means that it was made to output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a situation requiring confirmation of the gaming machine has occurred.

Further, the setting means sets the operation unit to a predetermined state in a state in which a predetermined abnormality occurs, and when the predetermined abnormality is all resolved while being in the predetermined state, the predetermined abnormality is completely resolved. Based on this fact, it was decided to be in a confirmed state. Therefore, since the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when the predetermined abnormality does not occur, the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Also, the setting means sets the confirmation state only when the operation unit is changed to the predetermined state in a state in which a predetermined abnormality does not occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being indicated unintentionally.

[Tenth Modification]
Next, a tenth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The game machine of this modified example can shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during a game.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
In this modified example, instead of the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 12, the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 49 is performed. In this probability setting value confirmation process, if the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is being played (step S511). If the game is not being played (step S511; N), the process proceeds to step S435.

On the other hand, if the game is being played (step S511; Y), the game interruption is set (step S512), the game interruption flag is set (step S513), and the process proceeds to step S435. As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode can be entered even during the game, and the game is interrupted during the probability setting value confirmation mode.

Also, after performing the process of step S442, it is determined whether or not there is a game interruption flag (step S514). If there is no game interruption flag (step S514; N), that is, if the game is not interrupted, the set probability confirmation process is terminated. Also, if there is a game interruption flag (step S514; Y), that is, if the game is interrupted, the game restart is set (step S515), the game interruption flag is cleared (step S516), and the probability set value End the confirmation process. As a result, the game that has been interrupted upon termination of the probability set value confirmation mode is resumed.

While the game is interrupted, the display on the collective display device 50 may be temporarily erased, or the state immediately before the interruption may be continued. Further, when the game is interrupted during the variable display of the special figure variation display game or the normal figure variation display game, the variation display on the collective display device 50 may be continued. Further, the collective display device 50 may display a display indicating that the processing is in an interrupted state.

In addition, when interrupting the game, an interruption command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and when restarting the game, a restart command is transmitted to the production control device 300, so that the display device 41, sound, LED, etc. An effect corresponding to the interruption may be performed using a light-emitting member or a movable accessory. Also, the display on the display device 41 when restarting the game may be the same as the display on the display device 41 when the power is restored.

Also, even during the interruption of the game, the winning of the starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning port 35 and the special variable winning device 38 may be validated or invalidated. Further, the game balls may be continuously put out even during the interruption of the game.

[11th Modification]
Next, an eleventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. The game machine of this modified example is designed to output a sound associated with the change of the probability set value.

FIG. 50(a) shows an example of changing the probability set value. When the game machine is powered off, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position to turn the setting key switch on (t11), and the game machine is powered on in this state. A value change state is entered (t12). Based on setting value change state, a command during probability setting change is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 informs that it is in the probability setting value change state based on the reception of this command. Outputs an announcement sound during change. Any sound may be used as the in-change notification sound, and examples include a sound saying "the probability set value is being changed", specific music, or an alarm sound. In addition, the display of the display device 41 and the sub-information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 are also used to notify that the probability set value is being changed. Also good. For example, the display device 41 may display the message "Probability set value is being changed". In other words, the effect device used in the game is used to notify that the probability set value is being changed. By notifying using the effect device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value is changed, and even if the probability setting value is changed illegally during business, the staff of the amusement arcade and the surroundings A player can notice this, and it is possible to prevent illegal games from being played.

Then, when the setting key of the setting key operating section is turned to the first position to turn off the setting key switch, the probability set value change state is terminated (t13). Based on the end of the setting value change state, a command for ending the probability setting change is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 sets over a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) based on the reception of this command. A probability setting value notification voice for notifying the information of the set probability value is output (t13 to t14). After that, a sound is output according to the state of the game (t14).

Although any sound may be used as the probability setting value notification sound, for example, as shown in FIG. 50(b), a sound corresponding to the set probability setting value is output. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, a voice saying "probability setting value 1 has been set" is output. Of course, other sounds may be used, and specific music or alarm sounds may be used. In addition, the display device 41 also performs a display corresponding to the set probability setting value in the same manner. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the message "Probability setting value 1 has been set" is displayed. Of course, other displays may be used.

In addition, the display of the sub-information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 correspond to the set probability set value, and the probability set value is notified. You can do it. That is, the set probability value is reported using the effect device used in the game. By notifying using the production device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value has been changed, and even if the probability setting value is changed illegally during business, the staff of the amusement arcade and the surrounding games can be notified. It is possible for the player to notice and prevent illegal games from being played.

When the probability setting value is changed, external information indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is output so that an external device (such as a hall computer) can recognize that the probability setting value is being changed. Also good. Similarly, in the case of the probability setting value confirmation mode, external information indicating the probability setting value confirmation mode is output so that an external device (such as a hall computer) is in the probability setting value confirmation mode. It may be comprehensible. By doing so, the amusement center can immediately grasp the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode, and can prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, the game may be prevented from progressing for a predetermined period after the probability set value change state ends. Also, the probability setting value notification sound may be output during the period in which the game cannot be progressed. By doing so, even if the probability set value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be played immediately, and the illegal progress of the game can be prevented. Further, when the probability setting value confirmation mode is set, the probability setting value confirmation mode is indicated by the speakers 19a, 19b, the display device 41, the sub-information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device. A performance device such as 44 may be used to notify.

Also, in the probability setting value change state, each time the probability setting value is updated by an operation, a sound corresponding to the updated probability setting value may be output. Also, other effect devices may likewise notify updated probability setting values corresponding to the update of the probability setting values. This makes it possible to easily confirm the selected probability set value.

Based on the above, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the fulfillment of a starting condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, Control means (game control device 100) for performing control, and setting means (game control device 100) for enabling selection of probability setting values to which probability values used for game lottery are assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating an operation unit. device 100), and a production device (speakers 19a, 19b, display device 41, sub-information display device 90, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, board production device 44) that performs game production, and is selected. The set probability value can be notified by the effect device. Therefore, fraud can be prevented in advance. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability set value can be changed. In addition, the production device can notify that the probability set value can be confirmed.

In addition, after the probability set value change state ends, the progress of the game is prohibited for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be played immediately, and the illegal progress of the game can be prevented.

[Twelfth Modification]
Next, a twelfth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. explain. In the game machine of this modified example, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting postponement function, an initial setting cancel function, an output ON holding function, and an output OFF holding function.
FIG. 51(a) shows an internal circuit and a connection diagram of the magnetic sensor 61 in this modified example.
The magnetic sensor 61 detects the state of magnetism in the installation environment to detect fraudulent activity using magnets or radio waves (magnet fraud). The magnetic sensor 61 is installed, for example, so that the distance from the surface (player side surface) of the cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 to the detection surface of the magnetic sensor 61 is 40 mm to 60 mm.

The magnetic sensor 61 has a SEL-IN terminal, for example, as shown in FIG. 51(a), and the sensitivity of the magnetic sensor 61 is set by the value of the resistor Rd connected to the SEL-IN terminal. That is, the sensitivity of the magnetic sensor 61 can be switched in a plurality of steps (for example, four steps). The sensitivity of the magnetic sensor 61 is selected by the resistor Rd connected to the SEL-IN terminal and set at the time of initial setting of the magnetic sensor 61. It is configured to be held internally until the power is turned off. is not possible.
The SEL-IN terminal is connected to GND via a resistance value corresponding to the sensitivity used (that is, via resistance Rd). The GND to which the resistor Rd is connected is common to the GND of the magnetic sensor 61 (that is, the GND connected to the GND terminal of the magnetic sensor 61).

The magnetic sensor 61 also includes a magnetic sensor main circuit 61a for detecting the magnetic state and determining the occurrence of an abnormality, as shown in FIG. 51(a), for example.
The magnetic sensor main circuit 61a includes, in addition to a circuit for detecting magnetism, reference magnetic state storage means for storing the magnetic state in the environment in which the magnetic sensor 61 is arranged as a reference magnetic state, and reference magnetic state storage means for instructing the start of storage of the reference magnetic state. The state storage command means compares the reference magnetic state with the magnetic state in the environment where the magnetic sensor 61 is placed at the present time, and when a difference outside a predetermined allowable range is detected, it is detected as occurrence of abnormal magnetism. Abnormal signal output means for outputting an abnormal signal as a signal.

The magnetic sensor main circuit 61a turns off the output transistor 61b and turns on the OUT terminal when abnormal magnetism is detected. When no abnormal magnetism is detected (when not detected), the output transistor 61b is turned on and the OUT terminal is turned off. Thereby, the game control device 100 can detect whether or not abnormal magnetism is detected based on the state of the OUT terminal of the magnetic sensor 61 . That is, the magnetic sensor 61 serves as abnormal magnetism detection means for detecting the generation of abnormal magnetism.
Here, "abnormal magnetism" is generated, for example, by the approach of a magnet or the emission of radio waves. It is in high condition.

Further, the magnetic sensor 61 performs an initial setting (calibration) operation for storing the reference magnetic state based on the power-on of the gaming machine 10 . In the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, when the voltage supplied to the magnetic sensor 61 reaches a predetermined value, the reference magnetic state storage command means in the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a stores the reference magnetic state in the reference magnetic state storage means. is started by commanding the start of
That is, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting function of performing an initial setting (calibration) operation in order to correct the influence of peripheral magnetism. The detection area is automatically adjusted by this initial setting operation, and the automatically adjusted set value is held internally until the power is turned off. The initialization operation takes, for example, a maximum of 1.5 seconds. Driving an electrical drive source such as a solenoid or motor, or bringing a magnet close to a solenoid or motor during the initial setting operation will cause the detection area to fluctuate due to the effect of magnetism. Care must be taken not to be affected by magnetism.

From the above, the magnetic sensor 61 (abnormal magnetism detection means) includes reference magnetic state storage means for storing the magnetic state in the installation environment of the magnetic sensor 61 as a reference magnetic state, and the reference magnetic state and the current magnetic sensor 61 Abnormal signal output for outputting an abnormal signal as a detection signal to the game control device 100 as a detection signal assuming that abnormal magnetism has occurred when a difference out of a predetermined allowable range is detected by comparing the magnetic state in the arrangement environment , and the reference magnetic state storage means starts storing the reference magnetic state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on.
By providing such a magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to set the standard magnetic state according to the installation environment of each gaming machine in the gaming arcade, in addition to the difference for each model, so that more accurate fraud detection can be performed. can be done. Further, since the reference magnetic state storage means starts storing the reference magnetic state when the game machine 10 is turned on, even if the reference magnetic state changes due to the movement of the game machine or the renovation of the amusement arcade, etc. and ensure accurate fraud detection at all times.

Further, the magnetic sensor 61 has a DOOR-IN input terminal (door signal input terminal), for example, as shown in FIG. 51(a). In the case of the state, the magnetic sensor 61 is configured not to function.
The initial setting operation at power-on is performed when both the condition that power is supplied to the magnetic sensor 61 and the condition that the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is in the Low state are satisfied. executed.
Therefore, if the door signal is in the Low state when the game machine 10 is powered on, the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is immediately started (see FIG. 52(a)).
On the other hand, if the door signal is in the Hi state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is started after the door signal becomes in the Low state (see FIG. 52(b)). That is, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting postponement function of executing the initial setting operation after the door signal becomes Low when the door signal is not Low when the gaming machine 10 is powered on.

Further, the magnetic sensor 61 has an initial setting canceling function of canceling the initial setting operation when the door signal becomes Hi during the initial setting operation. When the initial setting operation is interrupted, the initial setting operation is restarted when the door signal becomes Low again while the power supply to the magnetic sensor 61 is maintained.
Further, the magnetic sensor 61 sets the output transistor 61b to the output ON state (that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected (non 52(a) and (b)).
In addition, when the initial setting operation cannot be performed normally due to the influence of magnetism around the magnetic sensor 61, the magnetic sensor 61 turns the output transistor 61b to the output OFF state (that is, the same state as when abnormal magnetism is detected). 52(c)). In order to cancel the output OFF state of the output transistor 61b, it is necessary to turn off the power supply of the magnetic sensor 61 once and restart it while considering the influence of surrounding magnetism so that the initial setting operation can be performed normally.

Details of the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancel function, the output ON holding function, and the output OFF holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 will be described with reference to the operation chart shown in FIG. The "initial setting time" in FIG. 52 is the time from when the power of the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on until the detection state is output accurately.
FIG. 52(a) shows an operation chart when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on when the door is closed (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are closed), and the initialization is performed normally. Here is an example.
The magnetic sensor main circuit 61a starts the initial setting operation at the time (t21) when the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the voltage supplied to the magnetic sensor 61 reaches a predetermined value. The initialization operation ends within a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) from the start (t22). Further, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a keeps the output transistor 61b in the output ON state (that is, when no abnormal magnetism is (same state as when not detected)).

When the door signal becomes Hi during the initial setting operation, the initial setting canceling function is executed. Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a stops the initial setting operation, for example, when the door signal becomes Hi during the period from the start to the end of the initial setting operation (t21 to t22). The door signal becomes Low again, and the initial setting operation is completed only when the door signal is maintained in the Low state until the initial setting operation is completed. Note that the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a keeps the output transistor 61b in the output ON state from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the end of the initial setting operation (t21 to t22) even if the initial setting operation is stopped. do.

When the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal becomes Hi after the initial setting operation is completed, the output ON holding function is executed (t23-t25, t26-t29). Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a operates while the door is open (t23 to t24, t26 to t28) and until a predetermined standby time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the door is closed. During (t24-t25, t28-t29), the output transistor 61b is kept in the output ON state.
When the abnormal magnetism is detected (t31), the output transistor 61b is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected (t32), the output transistor 61b returns to the on state. However, since the output transistor 61b maintains the output ON state while the output ON holding function is being executed, if an abnormal magnetism is detected during the execution of the output ON holding function (t26 to t29), the output transistor 61b does not turn OFF when abnormal magnetism is detected (t27), but turns OFF when the execution of the output ON holding function ends (t29).

In FIG. 52(b), the door is closed (front frame 12 and glass frame 15 are opened) after the game machine 10 is powered on while the door is open (at least one of the front frame 12 and glass frame 15 is open). Both of the frames 15 are in a closed state), and an example of an operation chart when initial setting is performed normally is shown.
If the door signal is in the Hi state when the game machine 10 is powered on, the initial setting postponement function is executed (t41 to t43). Specifically, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on and the voltage supplied to the magnetic sensor 61 reaches a predetermined value (t41), the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a detects when the door signal is in the Hi state. starts the initial setting operation at the point in time (t43) when a predetermined waiting time (for example, 1 second) has passed after the door signal goes low. The initialization operation ends within a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) from the start (t44). Further, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a keeps the output transistor 61b in the output ON state (that is, when no abnormal magnetism is (same state as when not detected)).

When the door signal becomes Hi during the initial setting operation, the initial setting canceling function is executed. Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a, for example, when the door signal becomes High during the period from when the door signal becomes Low until the initial setting operation is completed (t42 to t44), Abort the initial setting operation. The door signal becomes Low again, and the initial setting operation is completed only when the door signal is maintained in the Low state until the initial setting operation is completed. Note that the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a keeps the output transistor 61b in the output ON state during the period from power-on of the game machine 10 to completion of the initial setting operation (t41 to t44) even if the initial setting operation is stopped. Hold.
After the initialization operation is finished, when the door signal becomes Hi, the output ON holding function is executed (t45 to t47, t48 to t51).

In FIG. 52(c), when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on when the door is closed (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are closed), the initial setting becomes abnormal, and the door is opened. After the game machine 10 is powered on in the state (at least one of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is open), the door is closed (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are closed). and an example of an operation chart when the initial setting becomes abnormal.
If the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is not completed normally, the output OFF holding function is executed (t62-t68, t72-t77). Specifically, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a, for example, automatically adjusts the detection area in the initial setting operation. , the output transistor 61b is in the output OFF state (that is, the same state).

That is, if the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is not completed normally, the magnetic sensor main circuit 61a turns off the output transistor 61b and turns on the OUT terminal, as in the case of detecting abnormal magnetism. As a result, since the magnetic error is notified, it is possible to make the store clerk recognize that the problem has occurred. In this case, the amusement arcade clerk, for example, judges that the output OFF holding function is being executed because the magnetic error is reported even though the magnet fraud has not been carried out, and executes the output OFF holding function. In order to cancel this, the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off once and then turned on again while considering the influence of surrounding magnetism so that the initial setting operation can be performed normally.

As shown in FIGS. 52(a) and 52(b), in order to use the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancel function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61, a signal input to the DOOR-IN input terminal ( door signal) must be switched between the Low state and the Hi state. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 51(b), by connecting the DOOR-IN input terminal to GND via a transistor Tr that turns ON/OFF according to opening and closing of the door (front frame 12 and glass frame 15), The initial setting postponement function, initial setting cancel function, and output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 can be used.

The transistor Tr serves as switching means for switching connection and disconnection between the DOOR-IN input terminal and GND. Specifically, the transistor Tr is turned on when the door is closed (both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are closed) to connect the DOOR-IN input terminal and GND. When the door is in an open state (at least one of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is in an open state), it is turned OFF to disconnect the DOOR-IN input terminal from GND.
Therefore, when the door is closed, the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is Low because the DOOR-IN input terminal and GND are connected, and when the door is open, the DOOR-IN input terminal is in the Low state. Since the IN input terminal and GND are disconnected, the state becomes Hi.

The DOOR-IN input terminal is a terminal used to reduce the influence of peripheral magnetism. That is, the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting canceling function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 are functions used to reduce the influence of peripheral magnetism.
For example, if the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is executed when the door is open, there is a possibility that the ambient magnetic field environment may be different from the initial setting state and the use state, but the initial setting is postponed. The occurrence of such a deviation can be avoided by executing the function or the initial setting canceling function so that the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is not performed when the door is opened.
Further, for example, when a detection signal (abnormal signal) is output from the magnetic sensor 61 when the door is open, the detection signal may be a detection signal due to changes in the ambient magnetic field environment caused by opening and closing the door. There is That is, there is a possibility that the detection signal (abnormal signal) is output even though the magnet fraud is not performed. By canceling, false fraud detections can be avoided.

However, when the initial setting postponement function or the initial setting canceling function is executed, the initial setting of the magnetic sensor 61 is not performed while the door is open and until a predetermined waiting time elapses after the door is closed. Since the action is not executed, there is a problem that it takes a long time from when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on until a game can be played.
In addition, when the output ON holding function is executed, magnet fraud is detected while the door is open and until a predetermined waiting time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the door is closed. Since the output of the detection signal (abnormality signal) is canceled in this case, the magnet fraud is targeted while the door is open or until a predetermined waiting time elapses after the door is closed. There's a problem.
Therefore, in this modified example, in order to solve these problems, the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancel function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 are disabled.

Specifically, in this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 51(a), the DOOR-IN input terminal is directly connected to GND, so the signal (door signal) input to the DOOR-IN input terminal is always in the Low state and never switches to the Hi state. That is, in this modified example, by directly connecting the DOOR-IN input terminal to GND, the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting cancel function, and the output ON holding function of the magnetic sensor 61 are disabled.
Therefore, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 53, for example, regardless of whether or not the door is open when the game machine 10 is powered on, the magnetic sensor 61 is activated when the game machine 10 is powered on. An initial setting operation is started (t81), and when the initial setting operation ends, the magnetic abnormality monitoring by the magnetic sensor 61 becomes effective (t82). On the other hand, when the game machine 10 is powered on, the radio wave abnormality monitoring by the board radio wave sensor 62 and the frame radio wave sensor (not shown) becomes effective (t81). Therefore, during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, radio fraud can be detected, but magnet fraud cannot be detected. Therefore, there is a possibility that magnet fraud will be carried out while the magnetic sensor 61 is being initialized.

Therefore, in this modified example, in order to suppress magnet fraud targeted during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, for example, as shown in FIG. made it possible to do
The processing related to the set probability value is processing performed according to the operation of the store clerk of the amusement arcade. That is, while the processing related to the probability setting value is being performed, the clerk is near the gaming machine, so fraudulent acts are less likely to occur. Therefore, by making it possible to perform processing related to the probability setting value in parallel with the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to suppress magnet fraud targeted during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modified example, instead of the main processing shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, main processing shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 is performed. In this main process, instead of the power-on delay timer process (steps S7, S11, S12), calibration timer process (steps S91 to S93) is performed.
In the main processing shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, after the power-on delay timer has timed out (for example, after 3 seconds have elapsed since power-on), the processing from step S13 onwards is performed. Therefore, the processing after step S13 is performed after the initial setting operation (within 1.5 seconds) of the magnetic sensor 61 is completed.
In the main processing shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, after the calibration timer has timed out (for example, after 1.5 seconds have passed since the power was turned on), the processing from step S48 onwards is performed. Therefore, the processing executed before step S48 is performed during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61. FIG.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, for example, the game control device 100 sets an initial value to the calibration timer immediately after the process of step S6 (step S91), and starts updating the calibration timer. (step S92), the process proceeds to step S8. By the process of step S92, the process of updating the calibration timer (for example, updating by -1) is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).
Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 55, immediately before the process of step S48, it is determined whether or not the calibration timer has timed out (step S93). repeats the process of step S93. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time has expired (step S93; Y), the process proceeds to step S48.

In the case of this modification, the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 requires a maximum of 1.5 seconds, so in step S91, a value corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set as the initial value. As a result, the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is reliably completed when the calibration timer times out.
In this manner, by performing the processing (steps S91 to S93) regarding the calibration timer in place of the processing (steps S7, S11, S12) regarding the power-on delay timer, probability setting is performed during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61. It is possible to perform a predetermined game control process (for example, steps S1 to S47) including a process related to the value (process for shifting to the probability setting value change state (steps S37 to S40)). As a result, a predetermined game control process including a process relating to the probability set value is executed in parallel with the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61. Therefore, the time from turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 to when the game can be played is performed. Save time. In addition, since it is possible to execute the processing related to the probability setting value in parallel with the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to suppress magnet fraud targeted during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61.

In addition, during the update of the calibration timer (that is, after setting the initial value to the calibration timer until the calibration timer times up), the command sent to the production control device 300 (command at the time of power failure recovery (Step S34), a command during probability setting change (Step S40), a command at the time of RAM initialization (Step S44), etc.) and a command sent to the payout control device 200, when the calibration timer times up You can send it. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands.

Also, after the determination that the calibration timer has timed up (step S93; Y), the effect control device 300 may be sent a command to inform the end of the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61. As a result, the effect control device 300 can drive an electric drive source such as a solenoid or a motor after confirming that the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is completed. That is, since it is possible to control the electric drive source not to drive during the initialization operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to prevent the electric drive source from affecting the storage of the reference magnetic state. can. During the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, only the electric drive source with low drive frequency is prohibited from being driven, and the electric drive source with high drive frequency such as a motor that is always driven is It may be possible to drive during the initialization operation.

Also, launching a game ball may affect the memory of the reference magnetic state. However, in this modified example, shooting of game balls is prohibited during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 . Specifically, a firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, and then an output processing (step S104) is performed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 4), thereby outputting a firing permission signal and firing permission. A signal can be set to the enabled state. In this modified example, after the calibration timer has timed out, processing for permitting an interrupt (step S48) is performed. Therefore, in this modified example, since the shooting of the game ball is prohibited during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, the shooting of the game ball does not affect the storage of the reference magnetic state.
In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 53, when the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61 is completed, the monitoring of the magnetic abnormality is enabled, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the door is open at the end of the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, the magnetic abnormality monitoring may be enabled after the door is closed.

Of course, it is possible to use the magnetic sensor 61 having the initial setting postponement function, the initial setting canceling function, the output ON holding function, and the output OFF holding function in other modified game machines. In addition to the main processing shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, in the main processing shown in FIGS. 36, 39, and 45, instead of the power-on delay timer processing (steps S7, S11, and S12), calibration It is possible to perform processing related to the timer (steps S91 to S93).

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the special game state can be generated when the result of the game is a special result. In such a gaming machine, when the calibration (initial setting) executed when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is suspended, and a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (for example, the body frame (front frame 12 ) and the transparent member holding frame (glass frame 15) closed), a magnetic sensor 61 capable of deferring calibration, and a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values used for game lottery are assigned. A setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting one probability setting value from among them is provided, and the execution of calibration postponement is invalidated, and processing related to the probability setting value (probability setting It is possible to perform processing (steps S37 to S40) for shifting to the value change state (see FIG. 53).

Therefore, since it is possible to perform processing related to the probability set value in parallel with calibration, magnetic fraud (magnet fraud) targeted during calibration of the magnetic sensor 61 can be suppressed.
In addition, it is possible to perform processing related to probability setting values in parallel with calibration, and the execution of calibration postponement is disabled (that is, the power is turned on regardless of whether a predetermined condition is satisfied). calibration is executed at the same time), compared to the case of performing processing related to the probability setting value after the calibration, or the case of waiting until the predetermined condition is satisfied before executing the calibration when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. , the time from turning on the power of the game machine 10 to when the game can be played can be shortened.
It should be noted that when a predetermined condition is established, it is not limited to the case where the body frame (front frame 12) and the transparent member holding frame (glass frame 15) are closed, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the process related to the probability setting value that can be executed in parallel with the calibration is not limited to the process (steps S37 to S40) for shifting to the probability setting value change state.
Specifically, for example, during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it is possible to execute the processing (steps S37 to S40) for shifting to the probability setting value change state as the processing related to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value A process corresponding to the probability setting value change process (step S108) may be executed as the process related to the above.
Further, it is possible to configure so that both the processing related to the power-on delay timer (steps S7, S11, S12) and the processing related to the calibration timer (steps S91 to S93) are not executed. In this case, during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, in addition to some processing (predetermined game control processing (eg steps S1 to S47)) in the main processing (FIGS. 54 to 55), the rest of the main processing Processing (for example, steps S48 to S59) and timer interrupt processing (FIG. 4) can also be performed. As a result, during the initial setting operation of the magnetic sensor 61, it becomes possible to execute the processing (steps S37 to S40) for shifting to the probability set value change state as the processing regarding the probability set value, and the probability setting value as the processing regarding the probability set value. The set value change process (step S108) becomes executable.

Further, the game machine 10 of this modification includes radio wave sensors (the board radio wave sensor 62 and a frame radio wave sensor (not shown)). It can be configured so that magnetic fraud (magnet fraud) monitoring by the magnetic sensor 61 is started at the end (see FIG. 53).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to monitor radio fraud in parallel with calibration.

《Announcement》
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modified example of the first embodiment) can execute a plurality of types of notification. Specifically, for example, volume notification for notifying the current volume, luminance notification for notifying the current brightness (brightness of LED or liquid crystal), error notification for notifying the occurrence of a predetermined error, and predetermined instructions to the player. It is possible to provide an instruction to notify, or the like.

In volume notification, for example, a volume image G11 informing the current volume value is displayed on the display device 41, and an operation sound corresponding to the player's volume change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b. For example, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the volume image G11 can be displayed during the variable display of the decorative special pattern (identification information) or during the display of the customer waiting demo screen. It cannot be displayed while the stop display is in progress or while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed.
Further, in the luminance notification, for example, a luminance image that notifies the current luminance value is displayed on the display device 41, and an operation sound corresponding to the player's luminance change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b. As shown in FIG. 56(a), for example, the brightness image can be displayed during the variable display of the decorative special symbol or during the display of the customer waiting demo screen, as with the volume image G11, but during the static display of the special decorative symbol. and cannot be displayed while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed.
That is, the variable display period of the decorative special pattern and the display period of the customer waiting demonstration screen are displayable periods in which the volume image G11 and the luminance image can be displayed, and the stop display period of the decorative special pattern and the display period of the power failure recovery screen are , a non-display period (non-display period) in which the volume image G11 and the luminance image cannot be displayed.

56(b) to (e), FIG. 57, and FIG. 58 show an example of volume notification. In addition, since processing similar to volume notification is performed in luminance notification, explanation using drawings will be omitted for luminance notification.
The volume can be adjusted within a predetermined range (for example, 5 steps from 1 to 5) by performing a volume change operation using predetermined operation means (for example, a cross key (not shown)). The volume change operation includes an increase operation for increasing the volume and a decrease operation for decreasing the volume, which are different operations.

FIG. 57 shows a timing chart when a short press operation is performed as a volume change operation.
For example, as shown in FIG. 57, when the player performs the volume change operation during the variable display of the decorative special pattern (identification information), the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t101). , to adjust the volume. Here, since the increase operation is performed as the volume change operation, the volume is increased by one step (from 3 to 4). In addition, a volume image G11 that informs the current volume (volume after change) is displayed on the display device 41, and an operation sound corresponding to the volume change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b at the current volume (FIG. 56). (b)-(c)).

Next, the effect control device 300 erases the volume image G11 when a predetermined volume image display time has elapsed after detecting the volume change operation (t103).
However, the volume image G11 cannot be displayed during the stop display of the decoration special symbol, as shown in FIG. 56(a), for example. Therefore, when the variable display of the decoration special pattern is stopped before the predetermined volume image display time elapses, the volume image G11 is erased when the variable display is stopped. On the other hand, the operation sound corresponding to the volume change operation (for example, the sound of "picone") is output until the operation sound is completed even if the variable display of the decorative special symbol stops in the middle of the operation sound. .

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, after the volume change operation is detected until the predetermined volume image display time elapses (t104 to t107), when the stop display of the decorative special pattern starts , the effect control device 300 stops the display of the volume image G11 at the time when the stop display starts (t105), but does not stop the output of the operation sound (see FIGS. 56(d) to (e)). Thereby, the player can recognize that the volume change operation has been accepted normally. That is, if the display time of the volume image G11 is shorter than usual, the player may feel uneasy that the volume change operation was not accepted normally. Even if the display time of is shorter than usual, the output time of the operation sound is the same as usual (that is, the operation sound is output to the end without interruption), so the player can accept the volume change operation normally and change the volume. It is possible to recognize that (volume adjustment) has been performed.
The same applies to luminance notification. That is, when the variable display of the decorative special pattern is stopped during the period from when the brightness change operation is detected until the predetermined brightness image display time elapses, the display of the brightness image is stopped when the variable display is stopped. Operation sound output is not stopped.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 57, when the player performs a volume change operation while the decorative special symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t108), but the volume The image G11 is not displayed, the operation sound is not output, and the volume is not adjusted.
Further, as shown in FIG. 57, for example, when a volume change operation is detected again (t112) during a period from when the volume change operation is detected until a predetermined volume image display time elapses (t110 to t113), , the effect control device 300 resets the count of the volume image display time when the volume change operation is detected again. Therefore, the volume image G11 is not erased when the predetermined volume image display time corresponding to the previous volume change operation has elapsed (t113), and the predetermined volume image display time corresponding to the last volume change operation has elapsed. is erased at the time (t115).
Further, when the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation when the volume is at the upper limit (or the lower limit), the volume image G11 is displayed, but the operation sound is not output or the volume is adjusted.

FIG. 58 shows a timing chart when a long press operation is performed as a volume change operation.
For example, as shown in FIG. 58, when the player performs the volume change operation during the variable display of the decorative special pattern (identification information), the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t121). , adjusts the volume, displays a volume image G11 for notifying the current volume on the display device 41, and outputs an operation sound corresponding to the volume change operation from the speakers 19a and 19b at the current volume.
Then, when the volume change operation is a long press operation (for example, a press operation longer than the output time of the operation sound), the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume in a predetermined time period (t123, t125), and , an operation sound is output in accordance with the volume adjustment, and the volume image G11 is updated and displayed in accordance with the volume adjustment.

Next, when the stop display of the decorative special symbol starts during the volume change operation (long press operation), the effect control device 300 stops the display of the volume image G11 at the time when the stop display starts (t126). , does not stop the operation sound output.
Also, the effect control device 300 does not display the volume image G11, output the operation sound, or adjust the volume even if the volume change operation is detected during the stop display of the decoration special symbol. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 58, even if the player continues the volume change operation (long press operation) while the decorative special symbol is stopped and displayed, the display of the volume image G11, the output of the operation sound, and the adjustment of the volume is not performed.

Then, when the variable display of the decorative special pattern starts during the volume change operation (long press operation), the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume at the time when the variable display starts (t128), and is displayed on the display device 41, and an operation sound corresponding to the volume change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b at the current volume.
Then, when the volume change operation (long-press operation) ends (t130), the effect control device 300 displays the volume image G11 at the point in time (t131) when a predetermined volume image display time corresponding to the last detected volume change operation has elapsed. erase.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 58, when the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation when the volume is at the upper limit (or the lower limit), the volume image G11 is displayed, but the operation sound is output. and volume are not adjusted (t129 to t130).

On the other hand, in error reporting, for example, an error image G12 that reports the content of the error is displayed on the display device 41 . As shown in FIG. 56(a), for example, the error image G12 can be displayed not only during the variable display of the decorative special design (identification information) or during the display of the customer waiting demo screen, but also during the display of the decorative special design (identification information). ) can be displayed while the display is stopped or while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed.
Here, errors mainly include the following. For example, a switch abnormality error indicating a disconnection of a switch connector, a shot ball failure error indicating that there are no game balls to be put out, an overflow error indicating that the upper tray 21 and the lower tray 23 are filled with game balls and cannot be put out, A payout abnormality error indicating that the payout control device 200 is abnormal, a front frame open error indicating that the glass frame 15 is open, and a game machine frame open error indicating that the front frame 12 is open. .

In addition, a frame radio wave error indicating that an abnormal radio wave was detected in the front frame 12, a board radio wave error indicating that an abnormal radio wave was detected in the game board 30, a magnetic error indicating that an abnormal magnetism was detected, and a special fluctuation. Large winning opening fraudulent error indicating detection of fraudulent winning to prize winning device 38, electrical fraud error indicating detection of fraudulent winning to normal variable prize winning device 37, detection of vibration of a certain intensity or more Vibration errors that indicate are also included as errors. In particular, in the case of a gaming machine that sorts out whether or not a game ball passes through a specific area within a variable prize winning device, and generates a state advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area, the vibration error is monitored. However, other game machines may also be monitored.

Errors also include a right-handed error indicating that a right-handed hit is detected in a game state in which a left-handed hit is to be made, and a left-handed hit error that indicates that a left-handed hit is detected in a right-handed game state. Regarding this right-handed error and left-handed error, without transmitting a command to the effect that the error has been resolved from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 monitors the establishment of a predetermined condition for ending the notification of the error, He is trying to complete|finish anomaly alert|reporting based on the said predetermined condition being satisfied.

Further, in the instruction notification, for example, an instruction image for notifying the content of the instruction is displayed on the display device 41 . As shown in FIG. 56(a), for example, the instruction image can be displayed not only during the variable display of the decorative special symbols and during the display of the customer waiting demo screen, but also during the display of the special decorative symbols, similar to the error image G12. It can be displayed during display or during display of the power failure recovery screen.
Here, the instruction is, for example, a hitting instruction such as a left-handed instruction to instruct left-handed batting in a game state in which left-handed batting is to be performed, or a right-handed batting instruction to instruct right-handed batting in a game state in which right-handed batting is to be performed. is mentioned.
That is, the variable display period of the decorative special symbol, the stop display period of the decorative special symbol, the display period of the customer waiting demonstration screen, and the display period of the power failure recovery screen are displayable periods in which the error image G12 and the instruction image can be displayed.

56(f) to (h) show an example of error notification. In addition, since the same process as the error notification is performed in the instruction notification, the description of the instruction notification using the drawings is omitted.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 56(f) to (g), when the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is opened during the variable display of the decorative special pattern (identification information), an error (here, front frame open error or game An error image G<b>12 is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the machine frame open error). The error image G12 is erased, for example, when the corresponding error is eliminated.

The error image G12 can be displayed even during the stop display of the decoration special symbol, as shown in FIG. 56(a), for example. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(h), the error image G12 is continuously displayed without being erased until the corresponding error is eliminated even when the variable display of the decoration special symbol is stopped. Similarly, in the case of the instruction image, even if the variable display of the decoration special symbol is stopped in the middle, the instruction image is continuously displayed without being erased until the display period of the instruction image ends.
56(f) to (h) illustrate the case where an error occurs during the variable display of the decorative special symbols. The error image G12 is displayed when an error is detected, and is erased when no error is detected.

In this way, the notification image (error image G12 or instruction image; hereinafter " 2nd notification image”) has a longer displayable period. This is because error notification and instruction notification are more important than volume notification and luminance notification.
On the other hand, the decorative special symbols are variably displayed during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and stop-displayed when the special figure variation display game ends. That is, since the decorative special symbols (stopped symbols) during the stop display inform the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game, the decorative special symbols during the stop display are better than the decorative special symbols during the variable display. Players are very interested. Also, among the screens displayed when the power is restored, the customer waiting demo screen is displayed when the power is interrupted while waiting for customers and the power is restored to resume the customer waiting state. Among them, the power failure recovery screen is a special figure fluctuation display game (a special figure fluctuation display game interrupted due to a power interruption) or a special game state ( Displayed when resuming a special game state that was interrupted by a power cutoff. That is, the power failure recovery screen is displayed when a power failure occurs during a special game display game or during a special game state, and notifies that the power failure has been recovered. The player is more interested in the screen.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, from the viewpoint of ensuring as much visibility as possible for the stop symbols and power failure recovery screens that are of high interest to the player, the first notification image with a low degree of importance is displayed during the stop display of the decorative special symbols and during the power outage. It is set so that it is not displayed while the recovery screen is displayed. Specifically, the second notification image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.) can be displayed together with the stop pattern and power failure recovery screen, while the first notification image (volume image G11, luminance image, etc.) It is not displayed with the stop pattern and the power failure recovery screen. That is, by adding the priority to be displayed to the notification image, the visibility of the stop pattern and the power failure recovery screen is hindered. It is possible to distinguish from notification images that should not be displayed up to. Therefore, since the visibility of the stop pattern and the power failure recovery screen is ensured as much as possible, the improvement of the game can be expected, and the notification image (second notification image) in the error notification and instruction notification is the stop of the decorative special pattern. Since it is possible to display the screen while it is being displayed or while the power failure recovery screen is being displayed, errors (including fraud) are less likely to occur, and even if they do occur, they can be dealt with immediately.

Here, in the present invention, the concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used in drawing control of the display screen displayed on the display unit of the display device 41 . Scenarios are, for example, scenarios for backgrounds, scenarios for left symbols, scenarios for right symbols, etc. Display effects such as variable effects of patterns are divided into multiple display layers (scenario layers) and prepared in advance as a table. This is a method of generating a picture of one screen by setting, controlling them individually as scenarios, and synthesizing all the scenarios.
Multiple display layers (scenario layers) are categorized for each display element, such as background, left pattern, right pattern, etc., and each independently displays multiple motion information simultaneously or continuously. It is set as a table of action scenarios for switching and displaying effects.

In the present invention, the display elements (display components) used in the presentation of the display device 41 are "background", "left pattern", "right pattern", "middle pattern", "notice 1 character", "notice 2 It is divided into eight elements of "character", "reserved display (decorative special figure start memory display)" and "small pattern".
Then, a scenario table for display effects such as variable effects is created for each of the plurality of display elements. In the present invention, the scenario table includes a "background control scenario table", a "left symbol control scenario table", a "right symbol control scenario table", a "middle symbol control scenario table", and a "notice 1 character control scenario."table","preview 2-character control scenario table", "holding display control scenario table", and "small symbol control scenario table".
Each display element is composed of a display layer, and a plurality of display layers are sequentially stacked from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen to create one display screen. In the case of the present invention, the display layers include a "background layer", a "left pattern layer", a "right pattern layer", a "middle pattern layer", a "notice A layer" to a "notice F layer", a "suspended layer" and There are 12 types of "small pattern layer".

In the effect display editing process (step C13) of the main process (FIG. 32), the effect control device 300 performs a process ( That is, a process of pasting a sprite of a predetermined image into the virtual drawing space) is performed.
The virtual drawing space is divided into 12 drawing areas from the drawing area for the motion management area 0 to the drawing area for the motion management area 11, as shown in FIG. Each drawing area is arranged in numerical order of the corresponding motion management area, and a display layer in which a predetermined image is drawn is stored in each drawing area.

Specifically, in the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 first, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 0 is not NULL, changes the “background layer” on which the predetermined image is drawn to the virtual drawing space. It is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 0.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 1 is not NULL, the "notice A layer" in which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 in the virtual drawing space.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 2 is not NULL, the "notice B layer" in which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 2 in the virtual drawing space.

Similarly, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 3 is not NULL, the "left pattern layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 3 in the virtual drawing space. If the data is not NULL, the "right pattern layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 4 in the virtual drawing space. Store in the drawing area for the motion management area 5 in the drawing space, and then store the "notice C layer" in the drawing area for the motion management area 6 in the virtual drawing space if the data in the address area of the motion management area 6 is not NULL. Next, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 7 is not NULL, the "notice D layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 7 in the virtual drawing space. If not NULL, the "reserved layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 8 in the virtual drawing space, and if the data in the address area of the motion management area 9 is not NULL, the "advance E layer" is stored in the virtual drawing space. store in the drawing area for the motion management area 9, then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is not NULL, store the "notice F layer" in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space; When the data in the address area of the motion management area 11 is not NULL, the "small pattern layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 in the virtual drawing space, and the effect display editing process is terminated.

If the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, the corresponding drawing area remains blank because the display layer is not stored in the corresponding drawing area. Specifically, for example, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is NULL, the display layer (in the case of the present invention, "notice F layer ”) is not stored, the drawing area for the motion management area 10 remains blank. It is also possible to store the display layers sequentially so that non-blank drawing areas are continuous (that is, store the display layers while moving them forward). Since the drawing area for storing display layers other than the background layer changes according to the number of display layers to be displayed, each time these display layers are stored in the virtual drawing space, the drawing area for storing the display layer (that is, a blank It is necessary to search for the most front (leading) drawing area among the drawing areas, which complicates the processing accordingly. On the other hand, as in the present invention, each display layer is stored in a predetermined drawing area regardless of the effect content (that is, the number of display layers constituting one display screen). Since it is not necessary to search the drawing area for storing the display layer each time the layer is stored in the virtual drawing space, the processing load can be reduced.

The display layers stored in each drawing area are sequentially stacked from the back side (lower layer side) of the screen toward the front side (upper layer side) of the screen in order of arrangement of the drawing areas to create one display screen. Specifically, in the present invention, for example, as shown in FIG. 59, the “background layer” stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 located at the top of the 12 drawing areas is the deepest in the screen. The "small pattern layer" stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 located at the end of the 12 drawing areas is arranged on the frontmost side (top layer) of the screen. be done.

In such effect control, when generating a effect screen (display screen), a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display elements of the effect screen are divided in advance and set as a table, and then they are individually set. are controlled as scenarios, and all the scenarios are synthesized in the form of display layers to generate a picture of one screen and display it on the display device 41 .
In the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 draws the first notification image (volume image G11, luminance image, etc.) on a predetermined display layer, for example, as shown in FIG. A second notification image (such as an error image G12 or an instruction image) is drawn on a display layer closer to the front side of the screen than the display layer on which it is drawn. Specifically, for example, when the first notification image is the "notice C layer", the second notification image is any one of the "notice D layer", the "notice E layer", and the "notice F layer". to be drawn.

Therefore, when a display screen including both the first notification image and the second notification image is displayed on the display device 41, for example, as shown in FIG. image, etc.) is displayed in front of the first notification image (volume image G11, luminance image, etc.). Therefore, when the display area of the first notification image and the display area of the second notification image overlap, the portion of the first notification image that overlaps with the second notification image is hidden behind the second notification image and cannot be visually recognized. It becomes possible. In the example shown in FIG. 60(b), the upper portion of the first notification image (volume image G11) is hidden behind the second notification image (error image G12) and cannot be visually recognized.

In addition, the effect control device 300, for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 (a) to (c), at least one of predetermined display layers (for example, "background layer", "notice A layer" and "notice B layer") display layer) to create a customer waiting demonstration screen and power failure recovery screen, and the first notification image (volume image G11 and brightness image etc.) and the second notification image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.).
Therefore, when the first notification image (volume image G11, luminance image, etc.) is displayed together with the customer waiting demonstration screen, the first notification image is displayed in front of the customer waiting demonstration screen. In addition, when the second notification image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.) is displayed together with the customer waiting demo screen and power failure recovery screen, the second notification image is displayed on the front side of the customer waiting demo screen and power failure recovery screen. Is displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 56(b) to (e) and FIG. 60(b), the variable display area of the decorative special pattern and the display area of the first notification image (volume image G11, luminance image, etc.) overlap. but not limited to this. The variable display area of the decorative special pattern and the display area of the first notification image may not overlap. Specifically, for example, the display area of the second notification image overlaps the variable display area of the decorative special symbol, but the display area of the first notification image does not overlap the variable display area of the decorative special symbol. A display area for the notification image may be set.
Further, during display of the second notification image (error image G12, instruction image, etc.), control may be executed to forcibly stop the variable display of the decorative special symbol.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the display device 41 for performing a game (decorative special symbol variation display game) in which the identification information (decorative special symbol) is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed, A first notification display (first notification image (for example, volume image G11 or luminance image)) on the display device 41, and a notification to display a second notification image (for example, an error image G12 or an instruction image) on the display device 41. Means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the first notification display can be displayed during variable display and during a customer waiting state in which no game is being played (for example, during display of a customer waiting demo screen), while during stop display The second notification display can be displayed during the variable display and the customer waiting state, and can also be displayed during the stop display (see FIG. 56(a)).

That is, the predetermined notification display is classified into a second notification display that can be displayed while the identification information (decorative special pattern) is stopped and a first notification display that cannot be displayed while the identification information is stopped. Therefore, the notification display can be preferably displayed so as to ensure the visibility of the stop symbols as much as possible. Specifically, for example, the notification display with low importance is set as the first notification display, and the notification display with high importance is set as the second notification display, so that the notification display with low importance is displayed together with the stop symbol. Therefore, it is possible to preferably display the notification display without hindering the visibility of the stop symbol due to the notification display having a low importance.
Note that the volume image G11 (first notification display) is not limited to a meter image that represents the volume value as a meter value, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be a numerical image that represents the volume value as a numerical value. .
Also, the first notification display is not limited to the volume image G11 or the luminance image, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the second notification display is not limited to the error image G12 or the instruction image, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first notification display (the first notification image (eg, the volume image G11 and the luminance image)) is hidden even while the power failure restoration screen is displayed on the display device 41. (See FIG. 56(a)).
By configuring in this way, the first notification display does not hinder the visibility of the power failure restoration screen, and the notification display can be preferably displayed.
In this embodiment, the second notification display (the second notification image (for example, the error image G12 or the instruction image)) can be displayed while the power failure restoration screen is being displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the second notification display may be hidden while the power failure restoration screen is being displayed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display screen displayed on the display device 41 is created by a plurality of stacked display layers, and the first notification display (first notification image (for example, the volume image G11 or the brightness image) )) and the second notification display (the second notification image (for example, the error image G12 or the instruction image)), the display layer for displaying the second notification display is used to display the first notification display. It can be configured to be located on the upper layer side (on the front side of the screen) than the display layer for displaying (see FIG. 60(a)).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the second notification display with priority over the first notification display.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment notifies predetermined information according to predetermined operations (for example, volume change operation and brightness change operation) of the player in the game machine including the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b. Display control means (production control device 300) for displaying notification display (first notification image (for example, volume image G11 or luminance image)) on display device 41; Output control means (production control device 300) output from, and the display control means prohibits the display of the notification display during the display of the notification display (for example, the stop display period of the identification information, When the power failure recovery screen display period) starts, the display of the notification display is stopped, and the output control means continues to output the operation sound even if the non-display period starts during the output of the operation sound. (see (d) to (e) in FIG. 56, t105 to t109 in FIG. 57, and t126 to t128 in FIG. 58).

That is, since the notification display has a non-display period, the notification display can be preferably displayed so as to ensure the visibility of the stop pattern and the power failure recovery screen as much as possible. Specifically, for example, by setting the stop display period of the identification information (decorative special pattern) and the display period of the power failure recovery screen to the non-display period, the notification display will not be displayed together with the stop pattern and power failure recovery screen. Therefore, the notification display can be preferably displayed without hindering the visibility of the stop pattern and the power failure restoration screen.
Further, even if the display time of the notification display is shortened by the start of the non-display period, the operation sound is output to the end without interruption, so that the player can recognize that the predetermined operation has been normally accepted. .
Note that the notification display for which the non-display period is set is not limited to the volume image G11 or the brightness image, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be the error image G12 or the instruction image.

《Button effect》
In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modification of the first embodiment), an operation valid period is set by an image displayed on the display device 41 as a button effect in which the operation of the effect button 25 by the player intervenes. It is possible to execute a button effect to notify, or a button effect to notify the operation effective period by light emission of the effect button 25 .
Specifically, the effect control device 300 can execute a first type button effect, a second type button effect, and a third type button effect.

In the first type button effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b), when the button effect starts, the display device 41 displays a button image G21 imitating the effect button 25 and the remaining operation valid period. A remaining length notification image G22 (here, a time bar image) that notifies the length, and an operation mode instruction image G23 that instructs the operation mode of the effect button 25 (for example, a character image such as "Press!" or "Continue!"). , and an effect change image G24 (here, a meter image) that changes according to the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed. That is, in the first type of button effect, the image displayed on the display device 41 can notify that the operation valid period is in progress and the remaining length of the operation valid period.

The second type of button effect is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62(c) to (d), when the button effect is started, the effect button 25 is switched from the off state to the light emitting state (for example, the lighting state). . That is, in the second type of button effect, the light emission of the effect button 25 can notify that the operation is valid.
In the third type of button effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62(e) to 62(f), when the button effect starts, the display device 41 displays the button image G21, the remaining length notification image G22, and the like. This is an effect in which the effect button 25 is switched from the light-out state to the light-emitting state. That is, in the third type of button effect, the image displayed on the display device 41 can notify that the operation is valid and the remaining length of the operation valid period. It can be notified that it is in the middle.

In the case of the first type of button effect, since the remaining length notification image G22 is displayed, it is possible to notify not only that the operation valid period is in effect but also the remaining length of the operation valid period. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make the player select at what timing of the operation effective period the effect button 25 is to be operated, or to make the player think to operate the effect button 25 because the end of the operation effective period is approaching. can be done.
Further, in the case of the second type of button effect, the effect button 25 emits light, so that the player's attention to the effect button 25 can be improved. Furthermore, since it is unknown when the light emission of the effect button 25 will disappear (that is, it is unknown when the operation effective period ends), it is possible to make the player think to operate the effect button 25 early before the light emission disappears. can.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, not only the first type button effect and the second type button effect, but also the third type button effect combining the first type and the second type can be executed. The performance can be executed, and the interest increases without becoming monotonous.
In the following description, the button effects of the first type, the button effects of the second type, and the button effects of the third type are simply referred to as button effects unless distinguished from each other.

FIG. 63 shows an example of the button effect of the first type.
When the special figure variation display game starts, the effect control device 300 starts the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game, as shown in FIG. 63(a), for example. That is, the display device 41 starts the variable display of the decorative special design.
When the special figure variation display game is a game that executes a first type button effect, the effect control device 300, for example, as shown in FIG. The first type button presentation is started. As a result, the display device 41 displays the button image G21, the remaining length notification image G22, the operation mode instruction image G23, and the effect change image G24.

When the player operates the effect button 25 during the valid period of operation, the effect control device 300 changes the value of the effect change image G24 (here, meter value).
Then, when the valid operation period expires, the effect control device 300 erases the button image G21, the remaining length notification image G22, and the operation mode instruction image G23, for example, as shown in FIG. Notify the results of the performance.

In this embodiment, the start timing and execution time of the button effect are set so that the button effect starts after the variable display of the decorative special pattern starts, and the button effect ends before the variable display of the decorative special pattern ends. It is That is, in the present embodiment, the effective period of operation related to the button effect is within the variable display period of the decorative special symbol.

The button effects of this embodiment include a button effect with a low expectation level (a button effect with a low level of expectation) and a button effect with a medium level of expectation (a button effect with a medium level of expectation). , and button effects with a high expectation level (button effects with high expectations).
Specifically, for example, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a loss, and reach does not occur in the special figure fluctuation display game, as a button effect to be executed in the special figure fluctuation display game, Expected If the button effect with a degree level of "low" is most likely to be selected, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, and the reach of SP reach or more occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game, the special As the button effects to be executed in the fluctuation display game, the button effects with the expectation level of "high" are most likely to be selected, and in other cases, the button effects with the expectation level of "medium" are most likely to be selected. there is

In the first type button effect and the third type button effect, the change amount of the effect change image G24 per operation of the effect button 25 differs depending on the level of expectation of the button effect. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the amount of change in the meter value of the effect change image G24 (meter image) per operation of the effect button 25 indicates that the expectation level is "low". If the expectation level is "medium", it is set to "+2", and if the expectation level is "high", it is set to "+3". Therefore, the amount of change in the effect change image G24 per operation of the effect button 25 can suggest the level of expectation for the button effect being executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 63, each time the effect button 25 is operated once, the meter value of the change image for effect G24 (meter image) increases by "2". It can be seen that the button presentation is being executed.
The amount of change shown in FIG. 64(a) may be the amount of change until the meter value of the effect change image G24 (meter image) reaches a predetermined threshold. Specifically, for example, in the case of a button effect with a "high" expectation level, the meter value increases by "3" each time the effect button 25 is operated until the meter value reaches a predetermined threshold value. (That is, it changes by the amount of change shown in FIG. 64(a)), and after the meter value reaches a predetermined threshold value, the amount of increase in the meter value per operation of the effect button 25 gradually decreases, and , After the meter value reaches near the upper limit, if the button effect is successful (for example, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is a special result), the meter value reaches the upper limit. On the other hand, if the button effect fails, the meter value may not reach the upper limit (that is, the meter value may not change even if the effect button 25 is operated). That is, the amount of change in the effect change image G24 in one button effect may be fixed, or may be changed according to the state of the effect change image G24 or the progress of the button effect.
Moreover, the effect change image G24 (meter image) is not limited to one in which the meter value increases according to the operation of the effect button 25. FIG. That is, the effect change image G24 (meter image) may be one in which the meter value decreases according to the operation of the effect button 25. For example, the amount of change in the meter value of G24 (meter image) is set to "-1" when the expectation level is "low", and is set to "-2" when the expectation level is "medium". If the expectation level is "high", it is set to "-3".

Here, in volume notification, for example, as shown in FIGS. As shown in f), the amount of change in the volume image G11 per reduction operation is always "-1". The same applies to luminance notification. Therefore, when adjusting the game environment (volume, brightness, etc.), the absolute value of the amount of change in the image (for example, volume image G or brightness image) for one operation is constant. This enables reliable adjustment.
On the other hand, in the first type button effect and the third type button effect, the absolute value of the change amount of the image (for example, effect change image G24) for one operation is not constant. That is, at the time of participation in the performance, variation is given to the absolute value of the amount of change in the image for one operation, so that it is possible to execute a highly interesting button performance that is not monotonous, and the performance button 25 is activated. function can be fully exhibited.

For example, as shown in FIG. 64(b), in the second type button effect and the third type button effect, the emission color of the effect button 25 differs according to the level of expectation of the button effect. Therefore, the color of light emitted from the effect button 25 can suggest the level of expectation for the button effect being executed.
It should be noted that the display color of the button image G21 may be configured to differ according to the level of expectation of the button effect. Furthermore, in the case of such a configuration, the display color of the button image G21 and the emission color of the effect button 25 in the third type button effect may or may not be the same.

In addition, the lighting state of the effect button 25 is not limited to the lighting state. That is, the lighting state of the production button 25 may be a flashing state. Furthermore, when the light emitting state of the effect button 25 is a blinking state, it is possible to configure the effect button 25 so that the flashing speed of the effect button 25 is different according to the expectation level of the button effect.
Also, it is possible to configure so that the remaining length of the valid operation period is indicated by the light emitting state of the effect button 25 . Specifically, for example, the flashing speed of the effect button 25 may be controlled to gradually increase (or decrease), or the light emitting color of the effect button 25 may be controlled to gradually approach a predetermined color. Alternatively, control is performed so that while the remaining length of the valid operation period is equal to or longer than a predetermined length, it is in a lighting state, and while the remaining length of the valid operation period is less than a predetermined length, it is in a blinking state. You can

In the example shown in FIG. 62, the effect change image G24 is not displayed during execution of the second type button effect, but it is possible to display the effect change image G24 during the second type button effect. be. In the second type of button effect, the expectation level can be suggested by the color of the light emitted from the effect button 25, so there is no need to suggest the expectation level by the change amount of the effect change image G24. That is, when the effect change image G24 is displayed in the second type of button effect, the amount of change in the effect change image G24 may vary depending on the level of expectation of the button effect. It may be constant regardless of the expectation level.
In addition, in the third type of button effect in which the first type of button effect and the second type of button effect are executed in duplicate, the start timing of the first type of button effect and the start of the second type of button effect. The timing may be different. Specifically, for example, an effect is executed in which the first type button effect is first started and the button image G21 is faded in, and at the same time when the button image G21 has completely appeared, the second type button effect is started. Then, the effect button 25 may be switched to the light emitting state.

Also, the effect change image G24 is not limited to a meter image in which the meter value increases (or decreases) in accordance with the operation of the operating means, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the effect change image G24 may be, for example, a numerical image whose numerical value increases (or decreases) according to the operation of the operation means.
Also, the effect change image G24 may be a character image that moves according to the operation of the operation means, and in this case, the movement amount of the character image becomes the change amount of the effect change image G24. That is, the amount of movement of the character image per operation of the effect button 25 differs according to the level of expectation of the button effect.
Also, the effect change image G24 may be a character image that is enlarged (or reduced) according to the operation of the operation means. This is the amount of change in the change image G24. That is, the enlargement ratio (or reduction ratio) of the character image per operation of the effect button 25 differs according to the expectation level of the button effect.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the display device 41 for performing a game (decorative special symbol variation display game) in which the identification information (decorative special symbol) is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed, A first display (for example, a volume image G11 or a brightness image) and a second display (for example, Display control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the effect change image G24) on the display device 41, and the first display has a constant absolute value of the amount of change based on one operation, 2 display, the absolute value of the amount of change based on one operation is different according to a predetermined condition (for example, the degree of expectation of the special figure variation display game being executed).

Therefore, the first display, in which the absolute value of the amount of change based on one operation is constant, is an adjustment image (for example, volume image G or brightness image) that changes according to the operation for adjusting the gaming environment. , it is possible to make a reliable adjustment. In addition, the second display, in which the absolute value of the amount of change based on one operation differs according to a predetermined condition, is changed according to the operation of the button effect by changing the effect change image G24. Button effects can be executed. That is, by operating the operating means, it is possible to perform reliable adjustments and to participate in highly interesting button presentations. can be effectively utilized.

Note that the first display is not limited to the adjustment image (for example, the volume image G or the luminance image) and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the second display is not limited to the effect change image G24 and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the operation for changing the first display and the operation for changing the second display may be performed using the same operation means.
In addition, the predetermined condition is not limited to the degree of expectation of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed (expectation of big hit or expectation of reach) and can be changed as appropriate. It can be. As a result, it is possible to suggest the result of prefetch determination by the second display.
Moreover, the first display and the second display may be displayed not only during the variable display of the identification information, but also during the big win (special game state) and during the display of the customer waiting screen.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first display (adjustment image (for example, volume image G or brightness image)) is not displayed during the period in which the identification information (decorative special symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 56 (See (a)), the operation valid period is not notified for the operation corresponding to the first display, and the operation valid period is notified for the operation corresponding to the second display, and the identification information changes as the operation valid period. It is possible to configure so that a period within the displayed period is notified (see FIG. 63).

By configuring in this way, for example, when a display screen including both the first display and the second display is displayed on the display device 41, an operation to change the first display and an operation to change the second display are performed. It is possible to suggest which operation should be performed preferentially. That is, by not announcing the operation valid period for the operation corresponding to the first display and notifying the operation valid period for the operation corresponding to the second display, the operation to change the second display is preferentially performed. can suggest what to do. Therefore, for example, by setting the second display to the effect change image G24 that changes according to the operation in the button effect, the game environment (volume, brightness, etc.) was adjusted, and thus the player could not participate in the button effect. Inconvenience can be avoided, and a decline in interest can be prevented.

During the non-display period in which the first display is hidden, the operation to change the first display is enabled, and the first display is internally changed (that is, the game environment such as volume and brightness is adjusted). ).
Further, during the period when the second display is not displayed, the operation of changing the second display may be enabled or disabled.
The temporary stop of the identification information (decorative special pattern) is not included in the stop display of the identification information, but the identification information is included in the variable display. Therefore, even if the identification information stop display period is a non-display period during which display of the first display (adjustment image (eg, volume image G or luminance image)) is prohibited, the first display is Displayable.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the display device 41 for performing a game (decorative special symbol variation display game) in which the identification information (decorative special symbol) is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed, the game An operation means (effect button 25) that can be operated by a person, and a notification means (effect control device 300) for notifying the operation effective period of the operation means, and the operation effective period is notified during the operation effective period. A first notification mode (see FIG. 62(b)) capable of recognizing the remaining time of the operation valid period and recognizing that it is during the operation valid period, and the operation valid period There is a second notification mode (see FIG. 62(d)) in which the remaining time is unrecognizable, and the first notification mode and the second notification mode can be used alone or in combination with each other (see FIG. 62) ).

That is, as the effect (button effect) in which the player's operation is intervened, an effect in which the operation valid period is notified only in the first notification mode, an effect in which the operation valid period is notified only in the second notification mode, and a second notification mode. It is possible to execute an effect in which the operation valid period is notified in both the first notification mode and the second notification mode. Therefore, since various effects can be executed as effects in which the player's operation is intervened, the effect in which the player's operation is intervened can be enhanced without becoming monotonous.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first notification mode (see FIG. 62(b)) uses an aggregate of monochromatic light sources of the same color (in the case of the present embodiment, the backlight of the display device 41). It is a mode for notifying the operation effective period, and the second notification mode (see FIG. 62(d)) is an aggregate of a plurality of monochromatic light sources (in the case of this embodiment, a group of light emitting elements built into the effect button 25). can be configured to notify the operation valid period using .
By configuring in this way, as effects (button effects) in which the player's operation is intervened, effects in which the operation effective period is notified only by a set of monochromatic light sources of the same color and a set of monochromatic light sources of a plurality of colors are provided. It is possible to perform an effect in which the operation effective period is notified only by the body, and an effect in which the operation effective period is notified by both an aggregate of monochromatic light sources of the same color and an aggregate of monochromatic light sources of a plurality of colors. . Therefore, various effects can be executed as the effects in which the player's operation is intervened, so that the effect in which the player's operation is intervened can be enhanced without becoming monotonous.

Note that the aggregate of monochromatic light sources of the same color is not limited to the backlight of the display device 41, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 may be provided with an assembly of monochromatic light sources (monochromatic lamps, etc.) that emit light during the effective period of operation.
Also, the group of monochromatic light sources of multiple colors is not limited to the group of light emitting elements incorporated in the effect button 25, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 may be provided with a set of monochromatic light sources (multicolor lamps, etc.) that emit light during the effective period of operation.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first notification mode (see FIG. 62(b)) uses an image displayed on the display device 41 (for example, the button image G21 or the remaining length notification image G22) to determine the effective operation period. , and the second notification mode (see FIG. 62(d)) can be configured to be a mode in which the operation effective period is reported by causing the operating means (effect button 25) to emit light.
By configuring in this way, as effects (button effects) in which the player's operation is intervened, effects in which the operation effective period is notified only by the image displayed on the display device 41 and operations by only light emission of the operation means are provided. It is possible to execute an effect in which the effective period is notified and an effect in which the operation effective period is notified by both the image displayed on the display device 41 and the light emission of the operation means. Therefore, various effects can be executed as the effects in which the player's operation is intervened, so that the effect in which the player's operation is intervened can be enhanced without becoming monotonous.

《Payout number notification performance》
In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modification of the first embodiment), as a payout notification effect for notifying the total number of payouts, during the special game state, the total payout from the start of the special game state to the current time is displayed. A first payout number reporting performance for reporting the number, and a second payout number reporting performance for reporting the total number of payouts from the start of the special game state to the current time during the special game state (first hit) and during the time saving state thereafter. is executable.
In this embodiment, the number of payouts based on the winning of game balls into the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is defined as the total number of payouts. In addition, the total number of payouts is not limited to the number of payouts based on the winning of game balls to the big winning opening, and can be changed as appropriate. It may be the sum with the number of payouts based on winning of game balls to 35.

FIG. 65 shows an example of the first payout number notification effect.
The first payout number notification effect is executed when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result that does not cause the time saving state.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result, and when the special result is a special result that does not generate a time saving state, the effect control device 300 , when the special game state based on the special result is started, the first payout number notification effect is started. As a result, the display device 41 displays the acquired cumulative number image G31 that informs the total number of payouts from the start of the special game state to the present time. Then, for example, as shown in FIGS. 65(b) to (d), every time a game ball enters the big winning hole, for example, "+14" is added to the payout total number.
Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(e), when the special game state ends, the effect control device 300 terminates the first payout number notification effect and erases the acquired cumulative number image G31.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 65(f) to 65(j), during the special game state, an overflow error occurs indicating that the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 is filled with game balls and the payout cannot be performed. In this case, an error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 65(j), for example, this error image G12 continues to be displayed without being erased until the corresponding error is eliminated even if the special game state ends in the middle.
Although FIG. 65(f)-(j) exemplifies a case where an overflow error occurs during the special game state, an error occurs similarly when another error occurs during the special game state. The image G12 is displayed when an error is detected, and even if the special game state ends in the middle, it is continuously displayed without being erased until the error is resolved.

FIG. 66 shows an example of the second payout number notification effect.
The second payout number notification effect is executed when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result that causes a time saving state.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a special result, and when the special result is a special result that causes a time saving state, the effect control device 300 , when the special game state based on the special result is started, the second payout number notification effect is started. As a result, the display device 41 displays the acquired cumulative number image G31 that informs the total number of payouts from the start of the special game state to the present time. Then, every time a game ball enters the big winning hole, for example, "+14" is added to the payout total number.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 66(b) to (d), in the second payout number notification effect, the display of the acquired cumulative number image G31 is displayed even after the special game state (first hit) ends and the time saving state starts. Continued.
Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(e), when the time saving state ends, the effect control device 300 terminates the second payout number notification effect and erases the acquired cumulative number image G31.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66(f) to (j), in the middle of the time-saving state (including the first hit), the upper tray 21 and the lower tray 23 are filled with game balls, indicating that the payout cannot be performed. When an overflow error occurs, an error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 66(j), for example, this error image G12 is continuously displayed without being erased until the corresponding error is eliminated even if the time-saving state ends on the way.
It should be noted that FIG. 66 (f) ~ (j) illustrates the case where an overflow error occurs in the middle of the time saving state, but similarly when other errors occur in the middle of the time saving state, the error image G12 is displayed when an error is detected, and continues to be displayed without being erased until the error is resolved even if the time-saving state ends on the way.

FIG. 67(a) shows an example of the display/non-display timing of the acquired total number image G31 and the error image G12.
For example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), when a special game state based on a special result that does not generate a time-saving state starts, the first payout number notification effect starts, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is displayed on the display device 41. (t151).
Next, when an error occurs, an error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41 (t152).

Next, when the special game state ends, the first payout number notification effect ends, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is erased (t153).
Next, when the error is resolved, the error image G12 is erased (t154).

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), when the special game state based on the special result of generating the time saving state is started, the second payout number notification effect is started, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is displayed on the display device 41. displayed (t155).
Then, when the special game state ends, the time saving state starts (t156).

Before the time saving state ends (that is, before the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the last special game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times)), the result of the special figure variation display game is special As a result, if the special result is a special result that does not generate the time saving state, the time saving state ends when the special figure fluctuation display game ends. Therefore, in that case, when the special figure variation display game ends, the second payout notification effect ends and the first payout notification effect starts.
On the other hand, the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a special result before the time saving state ends, and if the special result is a special result that causes the time saving state, the time saving state is extended. Therefore, in that case, as shown in FIG. 67(a), even if the special figure variation display game ends, the second payout number notification effect continues.

Next, when an error occurs, an error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41 (t159).
Next, when the time-saving state ends, the second payout number notification effect ends, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is erased (t160).
Next, when the error is resolved, the error image G12 is erased (t161).

As described above, in the first payout number notification effect, the acquired cumulative number image G31 is displayed when the special game state starts, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is erased when the special game state ends. On the other hand, in the second payout number notification effect, the acquired cumulative number image G31 is displayed when the special game state (first hit) starts, and the acquired cumulative number image G31 is erased when the time saving state ends. That is, the display period of the acquired cumulative number image G31 differs between the first payout number notification effect and the second payout number notification effect.
Although not shown in FIG. 56(a), the occurrence period of the special game state is also a displayable period during which the error image G12 and the indication image can be displayed.

In the gaming machine 10, the cumulative number of prize balls paid out in one special game state and the cumulative number of prize balls paid out in the special game state and the subsequent time saving state are displayed so that the player can The number of acquired game balls can be grasped to increase interest in the game. However, trouble is likely to occur in a state in which prize balls are continuously paid out, such as a special game state or a time saving state. Such troubles include, for example, a ball clogged in front of the inlet to the lower tray 23, and even if the balls are removed, the lower tray 23 cannot be released from being full. Problems such as payment not being able to be made. When such a trouble occurs, the game ball payout is stopped, and an error image G12 is displayed to notify the occurrence of an error (such as an overflow error or a payout abnormality error) that stops the game ball payout. .

In order to enhance the interest of the game, an image (for example, a total number of winnings image G31) that allows the player to grasp the number of game balls acquired by the player is displayed rather than displaying an error image G12 that notifies the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of game balls. In some cases, priority is given to the display, but this may cause the player to end the game before all the prize balls are paid out without noticing the error, which may be disadvantageous to the player.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display of the error image G12 is prioritized over the display of the cumulative number of wins image G31 in order to avoid the player's disadvantage due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of game balls. . "Priority" here means to display on the nearer side.

That is, in the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 draws the acquired cumulative number image G31 on a predetermined display layer, for example, as shown in FIG. The error image G12 is drawn on the display layer on the front side of the screen. Specifically, for example, when the acquired cumulative number image G31 is rendered on the "notice D layer", the error image G12 is drawn on the "notice E layer" or the "notice F layer".
Therefore, when a display screen including both the acquired cumulative number image G31 and the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41, for example, as shown in FIGS. The error image G12 is displayed on the front side of the cumulative acquisition number image G31. Therefore, when the display area of the acquired cumulative number image G31 and the display area of the error image G12 overlap, the portion of the acquired cumulative number image G31 that overlaps with the error image G12 is hidden by the error image G12 and cannot be visually recognized. becomes.

By the way, the effect control device 300 can store the number of winnings to the big winning opening in the RAM 322, and the payout total is based on the number of winnings to the big winning opening from the start of the special game state stored in the RAM 322 to the present time. A number is calculated, and the calculated total number of payouts is notified by a first payout number notification effect or a second payout number notification effect. Alternatively, the RAM 322 can store the number of paid-out game balls to be paid out based on the winning to the big winning opening, and the number of paid-out game balls from the start of the special game state stored in the RAM 322 to the present time is used as the total number of payouts. The number of payouts is notified by the number-of-payouts notification effect or the second number-of-payouts notification effect.
When a power failure occurs during the execution of the first payout number reporting performance or the second payout number reporting performance, the first payout number reporting performance or the second payout number reporting performance is restarted when the power failure is restored. However, since the RAM 322 is a storage means that cannot store and retain the stored information when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is stopped, the first payout number notification effect and the second payout number notification effect resumed after the power failure is restored. Therefore, it is not possible to report an accurate total number of payouts.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68(a) to 68(c), if a power failure occurs during the execution of the first payout number notification effect, the first payout number notification effect is restored after recovery from the power failure. is resumed. However, since the RAM 322 cannot hold the stored contents unless power is supplied, the total number of payouts notified by the cumulative number of acquisitions image G31 is cleared to 0, and the game is restarted.
The same applies to the case of the second payout number notification effect. That is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68(d) to (f), when a power failure occurs during execution of the second payout number notification effect, the second payout number notification effect is resumed after recovery from the power failure. be. However, since the RAM 322 cannot hold the stored contents unless power is supplied, the total number of payouts notified by the cumulative number of acquisitions image G31 is cleared to 0, and the game is restarted.

Also, when the system recovers from a power outage, processing is performed to check whether an error has occurred. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68, for example, if an error that occurred before the power failure occurred and was not resolved after the power failure was restored, the error image G12 that was displayed before the power failure occurred will be displayed even after the power failure is restored. . In other words, when the power failure is restored, the accumulated acquired number image G31 cannot be seen to continue to be displayed, but the error image G12 can be seen to continue to be displayed.

In the present embodiment, from the viewpoint of preventing a decline in interest, etc., when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is stopped, the storage means (RAM 322), which is unable to store and hold the stored information, stores the winnings in the big winning slots. It stores the number and the number of payout game balls. Specifically, for example, at the moment of power failure, if there is a game ball still rolling in the game area 32 (a game ball before entering the winning opening or the out opening), the game ball Even if you win a prize, the prize will be invalidated due to the power outage (accurate counting cannot be performed). Therefore, if the number of winning prizes and the number of game balls paid out to the large winning opening before the power failure are retained after the power failure is restored, the total number of payouts that does not reflect the winning of the game balls that were still rolling at the moment of the power failure is reported. It will be done, and the interest will decrease. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to avoid such an inconvenience, the number of winnings to the big winning opening and the number of payout game balls are stored in a storage means that cannot hold the memory.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 69, the board effect device 44 is provided with a movable accessory 44a movably provided in front of the display device 41. If the error image G12 overlaps with at least part of the error image G12 displayed in the display device 41, the occurrence of the error can be notified not only in the mode of displaying the error image G12 on the display device 41 but also in other modes. is preferred.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 69, the movable accessory 44a is at a first position (position shown in FIG. 69(a)) retracted from the front of the display device 41, It is assumed that it is possible to move between at least a part of the error image G12 and a second position (the position shown in FIG. 69(b)) that overlaps the front and back. In this case, the error image G12 is hidden by the movable accessory 44a during part of the period when the movable accessory 44a is moving and the period when the movable accessory 44a is at the second position, making it difficult to see.

In this case, the player may be unaware of the error and stop the game before all the prize balls are paid out, resulting in a disadvantage for the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(b), in addition to the first mode in which the error image G12 is displayed on the display device 41, an error sound (for example, "Please pull out the ball" is emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b. ”) is also used to notify the occurrence of an error. The error notification of the second mode may be performed only when an effect using the movable accessory 44a is being executed, or may be performed regardless of whether an effect using the movable accessory 44a is being performed. .
In addition, it is also possible to arrange a light guide plate (another accessory) or the like in front of the movable accessory 44a (on the side of the player). is likely to overlap with the error image G12, the effect by the light guide plate (other accessory) may be stopped or interrupted while the error image G12 is being displayed (that is, while an error is occurring).

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a special result, the variable winning device (special variable winning device) 38) to a state in which game balls are likely to win a prize, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state, a ball number notification display (acquisition cumulative number image G31) is displayed on the display device 41, and an error display (error image G12) is displayed on the display device 41 to notify that an error that stops the payout of game balls has occurred. With the second display control means (effect control device 300), the number of balls notification display and the error display can be displayed at the same time, and the error display has a higher display priority than the number of balls notification display (Fig. 67 (b)), the number of balls notification display is displayed during the special game state and disappears when the special game state ends, and the error display can be displayed during the special game state, It can be displayed even after the end (see FIG. 65 and FIG. 67(a)).

Therefore, the display of the error display (error image G12) is given priority over the display of the number of balls notification display (accumulated winning number image G31). can be displayed even after the end of the special game state, it is possible to avoid the player's disadvantage due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of game balls.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a special result, the variation winning device (special variation winning device 38 ) to a state in which game balls are likely to win a prize, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state, a number-of-balls notification display (accumulated winning number image G31 ) is displayed on the display device 41, and an error display (error image G12) is displayed on the display device 41 to notify that an error has occurred that stops the payout of game balls. A second display control means (performance control device 300) can generate a specific game state (time-saving state) different from the special game state after the end of the special game state, and can simultaneously display the number of balls notification display and the error display. The error display has a higher display priority than the number-of-balls notification display (see FIG. 67(b)), and the number-of-balls notification display is displayed during a specific game state, and the specific game state ends. Then, it becomes non-display, and the error display can be displayed during the specific game state, and can be displayed even after the specific game state ends (see FIG. 66 and FIG. 67(a)).

Therefore, the display of the error display (error image G12) is given priority over the display of the number of balls notification display (accumulated winning number image G31). can be displayed even after the end of the specific game state, it is possible to avoid the player's disadvantage due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of game balls.

The variable winning device is not limited to the big winning device (special variable winning device 38), but can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the present embodiment, an image having a higher display priority is displayed closer to the front, but the display priority is not limited to this. An image with a higher display priority preferably has higher visibility. For example, an image with a higher display priority may be displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen or displayed in a larger size. Alternatively, the image may be displayed in a display color with a higher brightness, or may be displayed with a lower transmittance (that is, an image with a lower display priority may be displayed with a higher transparency). Further, when the display timing of the first image overlaps with the display timing of the second image, which has a higher priority than the first image, the first image is displayed as non-display during the display of the second image. It can also be used as a display.
Further, in the present embodiment, an image with a higher display priority is drawn on a display layer closer to the front of the screen so that the image with the higher display priority is displayed closer to the front. is not limited to For example, it is possible to draw on the same display layer regardless of the display priority. , is drawn on the same display layer while being placed closer to you.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the movable accessory 44a movably provided in front of the display device 41 and the error display (error image G12) are displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from the manner in which the , and notification means (speakers 19a, 19b and effect control device 300) for notifying the occurrence of an error. (See FIG. 69).
That is, not only the first mode of displaying the error display (error image G12) on the display device 41, but also the second mode different from the first mode can be configured to perform the error notification.

By configuring in this way, even if the error display (error image G12) is hidden by the movable accessory 44a and becomes difficult to see, the occurrence of the error can be grasped by the error notification of the second mode. , it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of game balls.
Note that the second mode of error notification is not limited to the mode of outputting an error sound. Specifically, the error notification of the second mode includes the display of the sub-information display device 90, the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44. It is sufficient if at least one of them notifies the occurrence of an error. Further, when the game machine 10 is provided with a vibrator or a blower as a rendering device, it is possible to use the vibrator or the blower to perform the error notification of the second mode. Also, if the game machine 10 has a liquid crystal display device in addition to the display device 41, it is possible to use the liquid crystal display device to perform the error notification of the second mode.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling a payout mechanism (payout unit) that pays out game balls as prize balls. , an error (overflow error) indicating that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in a storage tray (upper tray 21 or lower tray 23) capable of storing the game balls dispensed from the dispensing mechanism, and the dispensing control means It can be configured to be at least one of an error indicating an abnormality (dispensing abnormality error).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the occurrence of an error that stops the payout of game balls.

《Direction sound and error sound》
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modification of the first embodiment) is capable of outputting a production sound for playing a game and an error sound for notifying the occurrence of an error from the speakers 19a and 19b.
In conventional gaming machines, it is common that error sounds are output with priority over effect sounds, that is, error sounds are output in a state where the volume of effect sounds is lowered (including mute state).
For example, the effect sound output during the special game state includes round BGM that is always output and sound that is output during a specific period (hereinafter referred to as "limited time sound"). The time-limited sound is, for example, a variable promotion sound that notifies that the probability state of the special figure variation display game will become a high probability state after the end of the special game state. Therefore, if the error sound is output with priority over the time-limited sound, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, if the time-limited sound is output preferentially over the error sound, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game.
However, there are a plurality of types of errors, and depending on the type of error, outputting the time-limited sound with priority over the error sound may cause inconvenience. Specifically, for example, errors related to fraud (front frame open error, game machine frame open error, frame radio wave error, board radio wave error, magnetic error, grand prize mouth fraud error, general electric fraud error, vibration error, etc. ), the time-limited sound is outputted with priority over the error sound for notifying ), the clerk of the game parlor will be late in noticing the occurrence of the error, making the game machine easy to cheat.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, predetermined sound effects are classified into a first sound effect and a second sound effect, and predetermined error sounds are classified into a first error sound and a second error sound. The output control is performed so that the priority is increased in the order of effect sound<first error sound<second effect sound<second error sound.
Specifically, for example, among the effect sounds output during the special game state, the round BGM is set as the first effect sound, and the time-limited sound such as the variable probability promotion sound is set as the second effect sound. In addition, among the error sounds that may be output during the special game state, the first error sound is the error sound not related to fraud that notifies the occurrence of an error that is not related to fraud such as an overflow error, and the frame opening error ( A second error sound is a fraud-related error sound that reports the occurrence of an error related to fraud such as a front frame open error or a game machine frame open error. That is, in the sound output during the special game state, the output priority is higher in the order of round BGM<non-fraud-related error sound<period-limited sound<fraud-related error sound.

FIG. 70 shows an example of output/non-output timing of the effect sound and the error sound.
For example, as shown in FIG. 70, when the special game state starts, output of the round BGM is started (t181).
Next, when the timing for outputting the variable probability promotion sound comes, the round BGM is put into a non-output state (t182).

Since the probability variable promotion sound has a lower priority than the frame opening error sound (error sound that notifies the occurrence of a frame opening error), during the period when the probability variable promotion sound and the frame opening error sound output overlap, the probability variable promotion sound is in a non-output state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 70, the period during which the output of the variable probability promotion sound and the output of the open frame error sound overlap is from t182 to t183.
In addition, since the probability variable promotion sound has a higher priority than the overflow error sound (error sound that notifies the occurrence of an overflow error), during the period when the probability variable promotion sound and the overflow error sound output overlap, the overflow error sound It becomes a non-output state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 70, the period during which the output of the variable probability promotion sound and the output of the overflow error sound overlap is from t182 to t184.
Also, since the frame-open error sound has a higher priority than the overflow error sound, the overflow error sound is not output during the period when the output of the frame-open error sound and the output of the overflow error sound overlap. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 70, the period during which the output of the frame open error sound and the output of the overflow error sound overlap is from t182 to t183.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 70, when the timing of outputting the probability-variable promotion sound, the timing of outputting the frame-open error sound, and the timing of outputting the overflow error sound come at the same time, the probability-variation promotion sound and the overflow The error sound is not output, and the frame open error sound is output (t182). Then, when the output of the frame open error sound is completed, the probability variable promotion sound is output from the middle (t183), and when the output of the probability variable promotion sound is completed, the overflow error sound is outputted from the middle (t184), and the overflow error sound is output. is finished, the output of the round BGM is resumed (t185).

Here, the non-output state is a state in which reproduction is performed but output from the speakers 19a and 19b is not performed. The non-output state may be a state in which neither reproduction nor output from the speakers 19a and 19b is performed.
Also, in FIG. 70, the overflow error sound is exemplified as the first error sound, but the first error sound may be an unfairness-unrelated error sound other than the overflow error sound.
In addition, although FIG. 70 exemplifies the frame-open error sound as the second error sound, the second error sound may be a fraud-related error sound other than the frame-open error sound.
Also, in FIG. 70, the probability variation promotion sound is exemplified as the second effect sound, but the second effect sound is a limited time sound other than the probability variation promotion sound (round promotion sound, V switch passing effect sound, etc.) Also good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the priority of the error sound unrelated to fraud is set lower than the priority of the time-limited sound from the viewpoint of ensuring as many opportunities as possible to output the time-limited sound. Specifically, fraud-related error sounds are prioritized over time-limited sounds, while fraud-unrelated error sounds are not prioritized over time-limited sounds. That is, by adding the priority to be output to the error sound, an error sound that should be output to the extent of preventing the output of the time-limited sound and an error sound that should not be output to the extent of preventing the output of the time-limited sound. can be distinguished. Therefore, since the chance of outputting the sound for a limited period of time is ensured as much as possible, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game, and since the fraud-related error sound is output with priority over the sound for a limited period of time, fraud is less likely to occur. can be dealt with immediately if it occurs.

It should be noted that a fraud-related error image that reports the occurrence of an error related to fraud may be displayed on the display device 41 when the fraud-related error sound that reports the occurrence of an error related to fraud is output.
Further, when outputting an error sound not related to fraud notifying the occurrence of an error not related to fraudulent activity, an error image not related to fraud notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the display device 41 .
Also, when outputting a limited-time sound (such as a probability variation promotion sound that informs that the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game will be in a high probability state after the end of the special game state), a limited-time image (special after the end of the special game state The display device 41 may display a variable probability promotion image or the like for notifying that the probability state of the figure variable display game will become a high probability state.

Also, the display priority of the fraud-related error image, the fraud-unrelated error image, and the time-limited image may or may not be the same as that of the sound. In other words, the display control may be performed so that the priority is increased in the order of error image not related to fraud <image limited to fraud <error image related to fraud (in the same order as the sound). The display control may be performed so that the priority is increased in the order of error image <injustice-related error image (order different from sound).
In the present embodiment, an image with a higher display priority is displayed closer to the front, but the display priority is not limited to this. An image with a higher display priority preferably has higher visibility. For example, an image with a higher display priority may be displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen or displayed in a larger size. Alternatively, the image may be displayed in a display color with a higher brightness, or may be displayed with a lower transmittance (that is, an image with a lower display priority may be displayed with a higher transparency). Further, when the display timing of the first image overlaps with the display timing of the second image, which has a higher priority than the first image, the first image is displayed as non-display during the display of the second image. It can also be used as a display.
Further, the method of displaying an image with a higher display priority on the front side may be a method of drawing an image with a higher priority on a display layer on the front side of the screen. may be drawn on the same display layer while arranging the image with a higher value on the nearer side.

Thus, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the speakers 19a and 19b, the output control means (production control device 300) for controlling the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the predetermined A special game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) executed based on the establishment of the condition is a special result, and outputs During the occurrence of the special game state, the control means selects a first effect sound (for example, round BGM) and a second effect sound (for example, A limited-time sound) can be output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and a first error sound (for example, a fraud-unrelated error sound) and the second A second error sound (for example, fraud-related error sound) whose output priority is higher than that of the first error sound can be output from the speakers 19a and 19b. If an error occurs to output 2 error sounds, the 2nd error sound is preferentially output, and if an error occurs to output the 1st error sound when the 1st effect sound is output, the 1st error sound is output. The sound is preferentially output, and if an error occurs in which the first error sound is output when the second effect sound is output, the second effect sound is preferentially output (see FIG. 70).

Therefore, since the second effect sound is output with priority over the first error sound, the error sound can be preferably output so as to secure as many opportunities as possible to output the second effect sound.
In addition, since the second error sound is output with priority over the first effect sound, the second effect sound, and the first error sound, for example, by using the second error sound as the fraud-related error sound, fraud occurs. It is difficult to do so, and if it does occur, it can be dealt with immediately.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the sound output means (speakers 19a and 19b) capable of outputting a predetermined sound, and the output control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the sound output from the sound output means ), display means (display device 41) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and display control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the display means, the output control means performs a predetermined operation The volume of the sound output means can be changed according to the effect sound (e.g., limited-time sound), the first error sound (e.g., fraud-unrelated error sound) for notifying the occurrence of a predetermined error, and the first error sound A second error sound (for example, a fraud-related error sound) having a higher output priority than the second error sound (for example, an error sound related to fraud) can be output. The sound is preferentially output, and when an error occurs to output the first error sound when the effect sound is output, the effect sound is output preferentially, and the display control means (the effect control device 300) outputs the sound. It is possible to display volume information (volume image G11) that can be changed according to the change in the volume of the means, and if an error that outputs a second error sound occurs when the sound effect is output, A second error notification image (e.g., fraud-related error image) corresponding to the second error sound can be displayed with priority over the corresponding effect image (e.g., time-limited image), and the first error sound is output when the effect sound is output. When an output error occurs, the first error notification image (for example, fraud-related non-error image) corresponding to the first error sound can be displayed preferentially over the effect image corresponding to the effect sound.

Therefore, since the effect sound is output with priority over the first error sound, the error sound can be preferably output so as to ensure as many opportunities as possible to output the effect sound.
In addition, since the second error sound is output with priority over the effect sound and the first error sound, for example, by using the second error sound as a fraud-related error sound, fraud is less likely to occur, and even if it occurs, It is possible to deal with the problem immediately.
The priority of sound is first error sound<effect sound<second error sound, while the priority of image is effect image<first error notification image<second error notification image. That is, the priority of sound and the priority of image are different. Therefore, the effect sound can be output with priority over the first error sound, and the first error notification image can be displayed with priority over the effect image, so the priority of the sound and the priority of the image are the same. When the first error occurs, compared with the case (that is, when the effect sound is output with priority over the first error sound and the effect image is displayed with priority over the first error notification image) It is possible to deal with the problem immediately.
Note that in the present embodiment, when the timing of outputting the first sound and the timing of outputting the second sound having a higher priority than the first sound overlap, if the timing of outputting the second sound overlaps, Although the first sound is in a non-output state, that is, in a mute state, the present invention is not limited to this. In other words, when the first sound is output while the second sound is being output, if the volume of the first sound is lower than the original volume (the volume when the output timing of the second sound does not overlap) (including a mute state), good.

《Operation sound and error sound》
As described above, when the player performs a change operation (volume change operation or brightness change operation) for adjusting the gaming environment, an operation sound corresponding to the change operation is output from the speakers 19a and 19b (see FIG. 56). reference). In the present embodiment, the operation sound corresponding to the change operation is set to have lower priority than fraud-related error sounds and higher priority than fraud-unrelated error sounds.
FIG. 71 shows an example of volume notification during error notification. In addition, since processing similar to volume notification is performed in luminance notification, explanation using drawings will be omitted for luminance notification.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 71, when an illegality-related error sound such as a frame opening error sound is not output, the effect control device 300 detects a volume change operation (t198, t201, t204 ), the volume image G11 is displayed, the operation sound is output, and the volume is adjusted. On the other hand, when a fraud-related error sound such as a frame-opening error sound is output, the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t191, t194), but the volume image G11 is displayed or operated. It is configured not to adjust sound output or volume.

72 and 73 show another example of volume notification during error notification.
The example shown in FIG. 72 differs from the example shown in FIG. 71 in that the volume image G11 is displayed and the volume is adjusted while the fraud-related error sound is being output.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 72, when the fraud-related error sound such as the frame opening error sound is not output, the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t198, t201, t204 ), the volume image G11 is displayed, the operation sound is output, and the volume is adjusted. Further, when an illegality-related error sound such as a frame open error sound is output, the effect control device 300 detects a volume change operation (t191, t194), and performs display of the volume image G11 and adjustment of the volume. However, it may be configured not to output the operation sound.

The example shown in FIG. 73 differs from the example shown in FIG. 72 in that the operation sound is output from the middle when the output of the fraud-related error sound ends.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, when the fraud-related error sound such as the frame opening error sound is not output, the effect control device 300 detects the volume change operation (t198, t201, t204 ), the volume image G11 is displayed, the operation sound is output, and the volume is adjusted. Further, when an illegality-related error sound such as a frame opening error sound is output, the production control device 300 detects a volume change operation (t191, t194), and displays the volume image G11 and adjusts the volume. After that, when the output of the fraud-related error sound ends (t195), if the original output period of the operation sound (t194 to t196) has not ended when the output of the fraud-related error sound ends, the operation It may be configured to output the sound from the middle.

It should be noted that at the time of outputting the fraud-related error sound that notifies the occurrence of an error related to fraud, the display device 41 may display a fraud-related error image that notifies the occurrence of the error. At the time of outputting a fraud-unrelated error sound that notifies of the occurrence of the error, the display device 41 may display a fraud-unrelated error image that notifies of the occurrence of the error.
Also, the display priority of the fraud-related error image, the fraud-unrelated error image, and the sound volume image G11 may or may not be the same as the sound. That is, the display priority of the fraud-related error image, the fraud-unrelated error image, and the volume image G11 (including images such as cross keys) may or may not be the same as the sound. . That is, display control may be performed so that the order of fraud-unrelated error image<volume image G11<injustice-related error image (the same order as the sound) becomes higher in order, or volume image G11<injustice-unrelated error image <Display control may be performed so that the order of fraud-related error images (the order different from the sound) has a higher priority.>

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the speakers 19a and 19b, the volume setting means for changing the volume of the speakers 19a and 19b according to the player's predetermined operation (volume changing operation) is provided. (Production control device 300), display control means (production control device 300) for displaying volume information (volume image G11) related to the volume of the speakers 19a and 19b on the display device 41 in response to a predetermined operation, and from the speakers 19a and 19b An output control means (production control device 300) for controlling the sound to be output, and an error sound (for example, fraud-related error sound) that notifies the occurrence of a predetermined error is output from the speakers 19a and 19b When the predetermined operation is performed in , the display control means displays the volume information, and the output control means does not output an operation sound corresponding to the volume information (see FIG. 72).

Therefore, since the error sound is output with priority over the operation sound, the error sound can be preferably output.
Further, while the error sound is output, the operation sound corresponding to the predetermined operation (volume change operation) is not output, but the volume information corresponding to the predetermined operation (volume change operation) is displayed. is successfully accepted.
Note that the error sound that is output with priority over the operation sound is not limited to the fraud-related error sound, and can be changed as appropriate.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above-described embodiment, and may be other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, and the like. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the modifications described above can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

For example, it is possible to output a predetermined sound at a volume different from the volume set by the player (or hall). The same is true for luminance.
Specifically, for example, when the player setting is "4", the volume of the fraud-related error sound is "4", the volume of the time-limited sound is "3", the volume of the non-fraud-related error sound is "2", The BGM volume may be set to "1". That is, the fraud-related error sound may be output at a volume set by the player, and the other sounds may be output at a volume lower than the volume set by the player.
Also, for example, if the player setting is "5", the volume of fraud-related error sounds is "7", the volume of time-limited sounds is "6", the volume of non-fraud-related error sounds is "5", and the volume of BGM is may be set to "4". In other words, an error sound unrelated to fraud (or a sound for a limited time) is output at a volume set by the player, and a sound with a higher priority than the error sound unrelated to fraud (or a sound for a limited time) is output to the player. may be output at a volume higher than the volume set by the player, and a sound with a lower priority than the error sound (or time-limited sound) not related to fraud may be output at a volume lower than the volume set by the player.
Also, in the above embodiment, the volume can be adjusted in the range of 1 to 5, but it may be adjusted to "0 (mute)". When the player setting is "0 (silent)", the volume of the fraud-related error sound may be set to "1", and the volume of the other sounds may be set to "0". That is, sounds other than fraud-related error sounds may be silenced. Of course, it is also possible to mute all sounds including fraud-related error sounds.

Moreover, it is also possible that the ratio of the volume output within a predetermined range is determined regardless of the volume set by the player (or the hall). That is, for example, the sound may be output according to the output volume value calculated by output volume value=m (player setting value)×a (magnification <coefficient> corresponding to each sound). However, when the sound volume set by the player (or the hall) is "0 (mute)", the sound other than the fraud-related error sound may be mute as described above. The same is true for luminance.
Specifically, for example, when the player setting is "3", the volume of the fraud-related error sound is "3.3 (1.1 times the magnification)", and the volume of the limited-time sound is "3 (1 times the magnification)". ”, the volume of the error sound not related to fraud is “2.4 (0.8 times the multiplier)”, the volume of the BGM is “2.1 (0.7 times the multiplier)”, and the player setting is “4” , the volume of fraud-related error sounds is "4.4 (multiplying factor 1.1)", the volume of limited-time sounds is "4 (multiplying factor of 1)", the volume of non-fraud-related error sounds is "3.2 (multiplying factor 0.8 times)", and the BGM volume may be set to "2.8 (0.7 times the magnification)".
In addition, if the specification is such that the volume value changes from the player setting value to the hall setting value when the customer wait state is entered, the output volume value = m (player setting value) x a (each Sound is output according to the output volume value calculated by the multiplier <coefficient> corresponding to the sound, and in the customer waiting state, the output volume value = M (hall setting value) x a (multiplier <coefficient corresponding to each sound >) may be output according to the output volume value calculated.

Error sounds and time-limited sounds can be output at a predetermined volume (for example, maximum volume) regardless of the volume set by the player (or hall setting). By configuring to output various sounds depending on the volume set by , even if an error sound or limited time sound is output during inspection, it is not noisy, so inspection work can be performed comfortably. It becomes possible.
Further, in the case where various sounds are output depending on the volume set by the player (or the hall), since the magnification and output mode of the various sounds are determined in advance, control is easy and Even if all the sounds overlap, the priority is clear, so the importance is easy to understand.

When the cross key is used for the volume change operation and the brightness change operation, the up and down keys of the cross key are used for either the volume change operation or the brightness change operation, and the left and right keys of the cross key are used for the volume change operation. When one of the up and down keys and one of the left and right keys is operated at the same time when either one of the change operation and the brightness change operation is used, the volume change operation and the brightness change operation are performed at the same time. (1) Only change the volume or change the brightness, (2) Do not change the volume or change the brightness, or (3) Change both the volume and brightness. You can
In addition, when the player performs a long press operation as a brightness change operation while adjusting the volume by performing a long press operation as a volume change operation, (1) the volume is changed even during the brightness change operation. (no brightness change), (2) the speed of volume change decreases during the brightness change operation (which can be a fine-tuning function), (3) the volume change and It may be dealt with by either not changing the brightness or (4) switching to the brightness change (without changing the volume) during the brightness change operation.

10 game machine 19a, 19b speaker (notification means, sound output means)
21 upper plate (storage plate)
23 Lower plate (storage plate)
25 production button (operation means)
38 Special Variable Winning Device (Variable Winning Device)
41 display device (display means)
44a movable accessory 61 magnetic sensor 62 board radio wave sensor (radio wave sensor)
100 game control device (setting means, special game state control means)
200 payout control device (payout control means)
300 Production control device (notification means, display control means, output control means, first display control means, second display control means, volume setting means)
G11 volume image (first notification display, notification display, first display, volume information)
G12 Error image (second notification display, error display)
G24 Effects change image (second display)
G31 Acquisition cumulative number image (ball number notification display)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a game in which identification information fluctuates,
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
and an effect display means capable of displaying a game effect,
It is possible to change the settings of the gaming machine by operating the operating means,
A gaming machine, wherein a display relating to the setting of the gaming machine can be displayed on the effect display means in accordance with an operation of the operating means relating to the setting of the gaming machine.

Images